WO2004005331A2 - Peptides derived from pep133 (g1p3, 6-16) - Google Patents

Peptides derived from pep133 (g1p3, 6-16) Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2004005331A2
WO2004005331A2 PCT/EP2003/006535 EP0306535W WO2004005331A2 WO 2004005331 A2 WO2004005331 A2 WO 2004005331A2 EP 0306535 W EP0306535 W EP 0306535W WO 2004005331 A2 WO2004005331 A2 WO 2004005331A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
pep
related peptide
polypeptide
peptide
protein
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/EP2003/006535
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2004005331A3 (en
Inventor
Guilaine Argoud-Puy
Lydie Bougueleret
Original Assignee
Geneprot, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Geneprot, Inc. filed Critical Geneprot, Inc.
Priority to AU2003249857A priority Critical patent/AU2003249857A1/en
Publication of WO2004005331A2 publication Critical patent/WO2004005331A2/en
Publication of WO2004005331A3 publication Critical patent/WO2004005331A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/46Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates
    • C07K14/47Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates from mammals
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides

Definitions

  • the invention relates to secreted active peptides.
  • isolated polynucleotides encoding such peptides, polymorphic variants thereof, and the use of said nucleic acids and peptides or compositions thereof in detection assays, for disease diagnosis, for disease treatment and for drug development
  • Interferons belong to the cytokine super-family of extracellular proteins involved in natural immunity. Interferon expression is usually induced by viral infection or inflammation (Charles A. - Janeway Jr., et al. , Immunobiology , 2001, Garland Publishing). The result of this induction
  • ⁇ -' interferons have an anti-tumoral activity (Harada H, et al., Bioc mie (1998),80:641-50).
  • type I alpha / beta / omega / theta
  • type II gamma
  • the secreted active peptides of the invention are induced primarily by human alpha and beta interferons.
  • Interferon beta plays a specific role in antitumoral activity (Xu L, et al., Human Gene Therapy, (1998);9 2699-2708; Horikoshi T, et al., Journal of Dermatology (1995);22(9) 631-6) and allograft rejection (Tovey MG et al., J.
  • Leukocyte Biol. (1996) 59 : 512-517) and is also an immuno-modulator used for the treatment of autoimmune diseases such as multiple sclerosis (Guthikonda P, et al., Journal Neurolmmunology, (1998),82(2): 133-9, Banner D, et al., Neuroscience Letters, (2002), 326 125-128).
  • autoimmune diseases such as multiple sclerosis (Guthikonda P, et al., Journal Neurolmmunology, (1998),82(2): 133-9, Banner D, et al., Neuroscience Letters, (2002), 326 125-128).
  • compositions related to secreted active peptides designated herein "Pepl33-related" peptides.
  • Such compositions include Pepl33-related peptides, having an amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 3 through 8, Pepl33-related peptides precursors, Pep l33-related antibodies, including monoclonal antibodies and other binding compositions derived therefrom, and methods of making and using these compositions.
  • Pep 133 -related peptides precursors of the invention include the Pep 133 -related peptides precursors of SEQ ID NO: 1 and 2.
  • the invention includes polypeptides comprising a sequence at least 95 percent identical to a sequence selected from SEQ ID NOs: 3 through 8
  • the invention includes polypeptides having at least 97 percent, and more preferably at least 98 percent, and still more preferably at least 99 percent, identity with any one of the sequences selected from SEQ ID NOs 3 through 8.
  • the invention includes polypeptides comprising a sequence at least 99 percent identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs: 3 through 8.
  • a preferred embodiment of the invention includes PepI33-related peptides having a posttranslational modification, such as an amidation, phosphorylation, glycosylation, acetylation, or an N- or O- linked carbohydrate group. Additionally preferred are Pep 133-related peptides with intra- or inter-molecular interactions, e.g., disulfide and hydrogen bonds, that result in higher order structures. Also preferred are Pep 133-reIated peptides that result from differential mRNA processing or splicing.
  • the invention includes modified Pep 133-related peptides.
  • modifications include protecting/blocking groups, .linkage to an antibody molecule or other cellular ligand, and detectable labels, such as an enzymatic, fluorescent, isotopic or affinity label to allow for detection and isolation of the protein.
  • Chemical modifications may be carried out by known techniques, including but not limited, to specific chemical .cleavage by cyanogen bromide, trypsin, chymotrypsin, papain, V8 protease, NaBH4, acetylation, formylation, oxidation, reduction, or metabolic synthesis in the presence of tunicamycin.
  • polypeptides of the invention which may provide additional advantages such as increased solubility, stability and circulating time of the polypeptide, or decreased immunogenicity (e g., water soluble polymers such as polyethylene glycol, ethylene glycol/propylene glycol copolymers, carboxymethylcellulose, dextran, polyvinyl alcohol).
  • Pep 133-related peptides are modified at random positions within the molecule, or at predetermined positions within the molecule and may include one, two, three or more attached chemical moieties.
  • a preferred aspect of the invention provides a composition comprising an isolated Pepl33- related peptide, i.e., a Pep 133-related peptide free from proteins or protein isoforms having a significantly different isoelectric point or a significantly different apparent molecular weight from the Pep 133-related peptide.
  • the isoelectric point and molecular weight of a Pep 133-related peptide may be indicated by affinity and size-based separation chromatography, 2-dimentional gel analysis, and mass spectrometry.
  • the invention provides particular polypeptide species that comprise an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs:3-8.
  • the particular polypeptide species further comprises contiguous amino acid sequence from SEQ ID NO. l .
  • Preferred species are polypeptides that i) comprise an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs:3-8; ii) appear in human blood serum; and iii) result from proteolytic processing of the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • the invention includes polynucleotides coding for a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO: 3 through 8, antisense oligonucleotides complementary to such sequences, oligonucleotides complementary to Pep 133 gene sequences useful in diagnostic and analytical assays, such as primers for polymerase chain reactions (PCRs), and vectors for expressing Pep 133 -related peptides.
  • PCRs polymerase chain reactions
  • the invention includes primer pairs for carrying out a PCR to amplify a segment of a polynucleotide of the invention
  • Each primer of a pair is an oligonucleotide having a length of between 15 and 30 nucleotides such that i) one primer of the pair forms a perfectly matched duplex with one strand of a polynucleotide of the invention and the other primer of the pair forms a perfectly matched duplex with the complementary strand of the same polynucleotide, and ii) the primers of a pair form such perfectly matched duplexes at sites on the polynucleotide that are separated by a distance of between 10, and 2500 nucleotides.
  • the annealing temperature of each primer of a pair with its respective complementary sequence is substantially the same.
  • the invention further includes methods of using Pep 133-related compositions, including antisense and antibody compounds, to treat disorders associated with aberrant expression of the Pep 133-related peptides of SEQ ID NO: 3 through 8 in an individual, and methods of using Pep 133- related compositions, including primers complementary to the Pep 133 gene and/or messenger RNA and anti-Pep 133-related antibodies, for detecting and measuring quantities of the Pep 133-related peptides in tissues and biological fluids.
  • the invention also further includes methods of screening for compounds that inhibit or increase the expression of Pep 133-related peptides, as well as methods of screening for compounds that interact with and/or inhibit or increase the activity of Pep 133- related peptides.
  • the invention further encompasses compounds thus identified, as well as compositions thereof.
  • the invention includes isolated antibodies specific for any of the polypeptides, peptide fragments, or peptides described above.
  • the antibodies of the invention are monoclonal antibodies.
  • antibodies that bind to a Pep 133-related peptide exclusively that is, antibodies that do not recognize other polypeptides with high affinity.
  • Anti-Pep 133-related peptide antibodies have purification, diagnostic and therapeutic applications, particularly in with respect to Pep 133-related peptide-related disorders.
  • Preferred anti- Pepl33- related peptide antibodies for purification and diagnosis are attached to a label group Treatment methods include, but are not limited to, those that employ antibodies or antibody-derived compositions specific for a Pep 133-related antigen.
  • the invention includes natural variants of the Pep 133-related peptide having a frequency in a selected population of at least two percent. More preferably, such natural variant has a frequency in a selected population of at least five percent, and still more preferably, at least ten percent. Most preferably, such natural variant has a frequency in a selected population of at least twenty percent. The selected population may be any recognized population of study in the
  • the selected population is Caucasian, Negroid, or Asian More preferably, the selected population is French, German, English, Spanish, Swiss, Japanese, Chinese, Irish, Korean, Singaporean, Icelandic, North American, Israeli, Arab, Turkish, Greek, Italian, Polish, Pacific Islander, Finnish, Norwegian, Swedish, Estonian, Austrian, or Indian. More . preferably, the selected population is Icelandic, Saami, Finnish, French of Caucasian ancestry,
  • the invention provides a vector comprising DNA encoding a Pep 133- related peptide.
  • the invention also includes host cells and transgenic non human animals comprising such a vector.
  • the method comprises the steps of (a) providing a host cell containing an expression vector as disclosed above; (b) culturing the host cell under conditions whereby the DNA segment is expressed; and (c) recovering the protein encoded by the DNA segment.
  • Another preferred method comprises the steps of: (a) providing a host cell capable of expressing a Pep 133- related peptide; (b) culturing said host cell under conditions that allow expression of said Pep 133-
  • the expression vector further comprises a secretory signal sequence operably linked to the DNA segment, the cell secretes the protein into a culture medium, and the protein is recovered from the medium.
  • An especially preferred method of making a Pep 133-related peptide includes chemical synthesis using standard peptide synthesis techniques, as described in the section titled "Chemical
  • the invention includes pharmaceutical compositions and formulations comprising a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO: 3 through 8, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier compound. Further aspects of the invention are also described in the specification and in the claims.
  • the present invention described in detail below provides methods, compositions, and kits t , useful for screening, diagnosis, and treatment of a Pep 133-related peptide disorder in a mammalian individual; for identifying individuals most likely to respond to a particular therapeutic treatment; for screening Pep 133-related peptide modulators; and for drug development.
  • the invention is used for drug development, e.g , to characterize a Pep 133-related modulator, the body fluid analyzed for the level of at least one Pep 133-related peptide is preferably from a non-human mammal.
  • the nonhuman mammal is preferably one in which the induction of a Type I IFN response by endogenous and/or exogenous agents is predictive of the induction of such a response a human.
  • Rodents and primates are particularly suitable.
  • the invention will be described with respect to the analysis of blood plasma samples. However, as one skilled in the art will appreciate, the assays and techniques described below can be applied to other biological fluid samples (e.g.
  • compositions of the present invention are useful for screening, diagnosis and prognosis of a living individual, but may also be used for postmortem diagnosis in an individual, for example, to identify family members who are at risk of developing the same disorder.
  • nucleic acids and “nucleic acid molecule” is intended to include DNA molecules (e.g., cDNA or genomic DNA) and RNA molecules (e.g., mRNA) and analogs of the DNA or RNA generated using nucleotide analogs.
  • the nucleic acid molecule can be single- stranded or double-stranded, but preferably is double-stranded DNA.
  • nucleotide sequence may be employed to designate indifferently a polynucleotide or a nucleic acid. More precisely, the expression “nucleotide sequence” encompasses the nucleic material itself and is thus not restricted to the sequence information (i e. the succession of letters chosen among the four base letters) that biochemically characterizes a specific DNA or RNA molecule
  • sequence information i e. the succession of letters chosen among the four base letters
  • an “isolated” nucleic acid molecule is one which is separated from other nucleic acid molecules which are present in the natural source of the nucleic acid.
  • an “isolated” nucleic acid is free of sequences which naturally flank the nucleic acid (i.e , sequences located at the 5' and 3' ends of the nucleic acid) in the genomic DNA of the organism from which the nucleic acid is derived.
  • the isolated Pep 133-related nucleic acid molecule can contain less than about 5 kb, 4 kb, 3 kb, 2 kb, 1 kb, 0.5 kb or 0.1 kb of nucleotide sequences which naturally flank the nucleic acid molecule in genomic DNA of the cell from which the nucleic acid is derived
  • an "isolated" nucleic acid molecule such as a cDNA molecule, can be substantially free of other cellular material, or culture medium when produced by recombinant techniques, or substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized.
  • a nucleic acid molecule of the present invention can be isolated using standard molecular biology techniques and the sequence information provided herein.
  • Pep 133-related nucleic acid molecules can be isolated using standard hybridization and cloning techniques (e.g., as described in Sambrook, J., Fritsh, E. F., and Maniatis, T. Molecular Cloning. A Laboratory Manual. 2nd, ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1989).
  • a nucleic acid of the invention can be amplified using cDNA, mRNA or alternatively, genomic DNA, as a template and appropriate oligonucleotide primers according to standard PCR amplification techniques.
  • the nucleic acid so amplified can be cloned into an appropriate vector and characterized by DNA sequence analysis.
  • oligonucleotides corresponding to Pep 133- related nucleotide sequences can be prepared by standard synthetic techniques, e.g , using an automated DNA synthesizer.
  • hybridizes to is intended to describe conditions for moderate stringency or high stringency hybridization, preferably where the hybridization and washing conditions permit nucleotide sequences at least 60% homologous to each other to remain hybridized to each other
  • the conditions are such that sequences at least about 70%, more preferably at least about 80%, even more preferably at least about 85%, 90%, 95% or 98% homologous to each other typically remain hybridized to each other.
  • Stringent conditions are known to those skilled in the art and can be found in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, N.Y (1989), 6.3.1-6.3.6.
  • a preferred, non-limiting example of stringent hybridization conditions are as follows: the hybridization step is realized at 65°C in the presence of 6 x SSC buffer, 5 x Denhardt's solution, 0,5% SDS and lOO ⁇ g/ml of salmon sperm DNA The hybridization step is followed by four washing steps-
  • hybridization conditions being suitable for a nucleic acid molecule of about 20 nucleotides in length.
  • hybridization conditions described above are to be adapted according to the length of the desired nucleic acid, following techniques well known to the one skilled in the art, for example be adapted according to the teachings disclosed in Hames B.D. and Higgins S.J. (1985) Nucleic Acid Hybridization: A Practical Approach. Hames and Higgins Ed., IRL Press, ' • Oxford; and Current Protocols in Molecular Biology. , .
  • ⁇ , .''Percent homology is used herein to refer to both nucleic acid sequences and amino acid , sequences. To determine the percent homology of two amino acid sequences or of two nucleic acids, the sequences are aligned for optimal comparison purposes (e.g., gaps can be introduced in the sequence of a first amino acid or nucleic acid sequence for optimal alignment with a second amino or nucleic acid sequence and non-homologous sequences can be disregarded for comparison purposes).
  • the length of a reference sequence aligned for comparison purposes is at least 30%, preferably at least 40%, more preferably at least 50%, even more preferably at least 60%, and even more preferably at least 70%, 80%, 90% or 95% of the length of the reference sequence
  • the amino acid residues or nucleotides at corresponding amino acid positions or nucleotide positions are then compared. When a position in the first sequence is occupied by the same amino acid residue or nucleotide as the corresponding position in the second sequence, then the molecules are homologous at that position (i.e., as used herein amino acid or nucleic acid "identity" is equivalent to amino acid or nucleic acid "homology").
  • the comparison of sequences and determination of percent homology between two sequences can be accomplished using a mathematical algorithm.
  • a preferred, non-limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for the comparison of sequences is the algorithm of Karlin and Altschul ( 1990) Proc. Natl Acad Sci. USA 87:2264-68, modified as in Karlin and Altschul (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5873-77. Such an algorithm is incorporated into the NBLAST and XBLAST programs (version 2.0) of Altschul, et al. (1990) J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-10.
  • Gapped BLAST can be utilized as described in Altschul et al., (1997) Nucleic Acids Research 25(17):3389-3402.
  • BLAST and Gapped BLAST programs the default parameters of the respective programs (e.g., XBLAST and NBLAST) can be used See http //www.ncbi. nlm.nih.gov.
  • Another preferred, non-limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for the comparison of sequences is the algorithm of Myers and Miller, CABIOS (1989). Such an algorithm is incorporated into the ALIGN program (version 2.0) which is part of the GCG sequence alignment software package.
  • ALIGN program version 2.0
  • a PAM120 weight residue table, a gap length penalty of 12, and a gap penalty of 4 can be used. .- ⁇ , • ' !• . . • - , " • .
  • polypeptide refers to a polymer of aminofactacids without regard to the length of ⁇ the polymer; thus, peptides, oligopep tides, and proteins are included within the definition of polypeptide. This term also does not specify or exclude post-translational modifications of polypeptides.
  • polypeptides include those with covalent attachment of glycosyl, acetyl, phosphate, amide, lipid, carboxyl, acyl or carbohydrate groups.
  • polypeptides which contain one or more analogs of an amino acid include, for example, non-natural occurring amino acids, amino acids which only occur naturally in an unrelated biological system, modified amino acids from mammalian systems etc.), polypeptides with substituted linkages, as well as other modifications known in the art, both naturally occurring and non-naturally occurring.
  • protein as used herein may be used synonymously with the term “polypeptide” or may refer to, in addition, a complex of two or more polypeptides which may be linked by bonds other than peptide bonds, for example, such polypeptides making up the protein may be linked by disulfide bonds
  • protein may also comprehend a family of polypeptides having identical amino acid sequences but different post-translational modifications, particularly as may be added when such proteins are expressed in eukaryotic hosts.
  • an “isolated” or “purified” protein or biologically active portion thereof is substantially free of cellular material or other contaminating proteins from the cell or tissue source from which the Pep 133 -related peptide, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof is derived, or substantially free from chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized.
  • the language “substantially free of cellular material” includes preparations of a protein according to the invention (e.g. Pep 133-related peptide, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof) in which the protein is separated from cellular components of the cells from which it is isolated or recombinantly produced.
  • the language "substantially free of cellular material” includes preparations of a protein according to the invention having less than about 30% (by dry weight) of protein other than the Pep 133 -related peptide (also referred to herein as a "contaminating protein"), more preferably less than about 20% of protein other than the protein according to the invention, still more preferably less than about 10% of protein other than the protein according to the invention, and most preferably less than about 5% of protein other than the protein according to the invention.
  • culture medium represents less than about 20%, more preferably less than about 10%, and most preferably less than about 5% of the volume of the protein preparation.
  • substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals includes v preparations of Pep 133-related peptide, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof in which the protein is separated from chemical precursors or other chemicals which are involved in the, synthesis of the protein.
  • the language "substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals” includes preparations of a Pep 133-related peptide having less than about 30% (by dry weight) of chemical precursors or non-Pep 133-related peptides chemicals, more preferably less than about 20% chemical precursors or non-Pep 133-related peptides chemicals, still more preferably less than about 10% chemical precursors or non-Pep 133-related peptides chemicals, and most preferably less than about 5% chemical precursors or non-Pep 133-related peptides chemicals.
  • polypeptide refers to polypeptides that have been artificially designed and which comprise at least two polypeptide sequences that are not found as contiguous polypeptide sequences in their initial natural environment, or to refer to polypeptides which have been expressed from a recombinant polynucleotide.
  • Pep 133 peptide or "Pep 133-related peptide” refers to a peptide comprising the sequence described by those selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs: 3-8. Such peptide may be post-translationally modified (e.g., amidated, phosphorylated, acylated, or glycosylated).
  • Pep 133 peptide may also contain other structural or chemical modifications such as disulfide linkages or amino acid side chain interactions such as hydrogen and amide bonds that result in complex secondary and tertiary structures.
  • the terms "Pep 133-related peptide” and "Pep 133-related peptides” are used herein to embrace any and all of the peptides, polypeptides and proteins of the present invention. These include mutant polypeptides, such as deletion, addition, swap, or truncation mutants, fusion polypeptides comprising such polypeptides, and polypeptide fragments of at least three, but preferably 8, 10, 12, 15, or 21 contiguous amino acids of the sequences of SEQ ID NOs:3-8.
  • the invention embodies polypeptides encoded by the nucleic acid sequences of the Pep 133 gene or messenger RNA, as well as the Pep 133 -related peptides from humans, including isolated or purified Pep 133-related peptides consisting of, consisting essentially of, or comprising the sequence of SEQ ID NOs 3-8.
  • Preferred Pep 133-related peptides retain at least one biological activity of Pepl33
  • biological activity refers to any function carried out by Pep 133.
  • antigenicity or the ability to bind an anti-Pepl 33-related peptide specific antibody
  • immunogenicity or the ability to generate an anti-Pepl 33-related peptide specific antibody
  • mediating cell proliferation or cell cycle (4) interacting with a Pep 133- related target molecule, preferably a protein, (5) circulating in human plasma; (6) mediating a Type I IFN -induced anti-cell growth response; (7) mediating a Type I IFN-induced anti -inflammatory response; (8) displaying an amidyl modification; and (9) undergoing dibasic cleavage.
  • antibody refers to immunoglobulin molecules and immunologically active portions . of immunoglobulin molecules, i.e., molecules that contain an antigen binding site which specifically - • ⁇ binds (immunoreacts with) an antigen, , such as a Pep 133 -related pep tide, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof.
  • immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules include F(ab) and F(ab') 2 fragments which can be generated by treating the antibody with an enzyme such as pepsin.
  • the invention provides polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies that bind a Pep 133-related peptide, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof.
  • a monoclonal antibody composition thus typically displays a single binding affinity for a particular Pep 133-related peptide with which it immunoreacts.
  • Preferred anti-Pep 133-related antibodies recognize an amidated form of a Pep 133 -related peptide .
  • label group is any compound that, when attached to a polynucleotide or polypeptide (including antibodies), allows for detection or purification of said polynucleotide or polypeptide. Label groups may be detected or purified directly or indirectly by a secondary compound, including an antibody specific for said label group. Useful label groups include
  • radioisotopes e.g., P, S, H, I
  • fluorescent compounds e.g., 5-bromodesoxyu ⁇ d ⁇ n, umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride, phycoerythrin acetylaminofluorene, digoxigenin
  • luminescent compounds e.g., luminol, GFP, luciferin, aequorin
  • enzymes or enzyme co-factor detectable labels e.g., peroxidase, luciferase, alkaline phosphatase, galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase
  • compounds that are recognized by a secondary factor such as strepavidin, GST, or biotin.
  • a label group is attached to a polynucleotide or polypeptide in
  • Radioisotopes may be detected by direct counting of radioemmission, film exposure, or by 5 scintillation counting, for example.
  • Enzymatic labels may be detected by determination of conversion of an appropriate substrate to product, usually causing a fluorescent reaction.
  • Fluorescent and luminescent compounds and reactions may be detected by, e.g., radioemmission, fluorescent microscopy, fluorescent activated cell sorting, or a luminometer.
  • vector refers to a nucleic acid molecule capable of transporting
  • vectors which refers to a circular double stranded DNA loop into which additional DNA segments can be ligated.
  • plasmid refers to a circular double stranded DNA loop into which additional DNA segments can be ligated.
  • viral vector Another type of vector is a viral vector, wherein additional DNA segments can be ligated into the viral genome.
  • Certain vectors are capable of autonomous replication in a host cell into which they are ' • - ⁇ . introduced (e.g., bacterial vectors having a bacterial origin of replication and episomal mammalian
  • vectors e.g., non-episomal mammalian vectors
  • Other vectors e.g., non-episomal mammalian vectors
  • expression vectors are integrated into the genome of a • host cell upon introduction into the host cell, and thereby are replicated along with the host genome
  • certain vectors are capable of directing the expression of genes to which they are operatively linked.
  • Such vectors are referred to herein as "expression vectors”.
  • expression vectors of utility in recombinant DNA techniques are often in the form of plasmids. In the present
  • plasmid and "vector” can be used interchangeably as the plasmid is the most commonly used form of vector.
  • the invention is intended to include such other forms of expression vectors, such as viral vectors (e.g., replication defective retroviruses, adenoviruses and adeno-associated viruses), which serve equivalent functions.
  • viral vectors e.g., replication defective retroviruses, adenoviruses and adeno-associated viruses
  • an agent preferably a Pep 133-
  • an effective amount of a Pep 133-related peptide is the amount of the peptide or biologically active fragment thereof required to reduce cell growth by 5% or 10%.
  • the effective amount for a particular patient may vary depending on such factors as the diagnostic method of the symptom being measured, the state of the condition being treated, the overall health of the patient, method of administration, and
  • the Pep 133-related peptides of the invention are listed as SEQ ID NO: 3 through 8. These secreted peptides are predicted to be active peptides released from their precursors by dibasic 35 cleavage. Furthermore, the peptides of SEQ ID NO' 3, 5 and 7 may possess a C-terminal amidation.
  • Amidation of bioactive peptides is well-known (P ⁇ gge ST, et al , Cell Mol Life Sci 2000 Aug;57(8- 9)- 1236-59), and in this case, the C-terminal alanine is amidated and the adjacent glycme donates the amide group
  • the conversion is a two step process: peptidyl glycine is converted to peptidyl alpha- hyroxyglycine by peptidyl glycine alpha-hydroxylating monooxygenase (PHM), then this is 5 converted to the peptidyl amide by peptidyl alpha-hydroxyglycing alpha-amidating lyase (PAL) with the simultaneous production of glyoxylic acid.
  • the conversion could possibly occur after secretion in the human plasma (Kapuscinski M, et al., C n. Endocnnol (Oxf) 1993 Jul;39(l):51-8)
  • the Pep 133-related peptides are shown herein to possess sequence identity with a sub-region of an interferon-induced predicted protein that exists as multiple splice variant forms (Turri MG, et al.,
  • Each of the peptides from SEQ ID NO' 3, 5 and 7 corresponds to the product of the cleavage at a dibasic site of the mature form of one of the splice variant forms SEQ ID NO: 1 and 2 represent the precursor and mature polypeptide, respectively, .giving rise to the Pep 133-related peptide from SEQ ID NO' 3.
  • Pep 133-related peptides are induced by response to human alpha and beta interferons, but.
  • Pep 133-related peptide and “Pep 133-related peptides” are used herein to embrace any and all of the peptides, polypeptides and proteins of the present invention. Also forming part of the invention are polypeptides encoded by the polynucleotides of the invention, as well as fusion polypeptides comprising such polypeptides. The invention embodies polypeptides
  • Pep 133 gene encoded by the nucleic acid sequences of the Pep 133 gene, as well as the Pep 133-related peptides from humans, including isolated or purified Pepl33-related peptides consisting of, consisting essentially of, or comprising the sequence of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8.
  • the present invention embodies isolated, purified, and recombinant polypeptides comprising a contiguous span of at least 3 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids.
  • isolated, purified, and recombinant polypeptides comprising a contiguous span of at least 3 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids.
  • the contiguous stretch of amino acids comprises the site of a mutation or functional mutation, including a deletion, addition, swap or truncation of the amino acids in the Pep 133-related peptide sequence.
  • the invention also concerns the polypeptide encoded by the Pep 133-related nucleotide sequences of the invention, or a complementary sequence thereof or a fragment thereof.
  • One aspect of the invention pertains to isolated Pep 133-related peptides, and biologically
  • native Pep 133-related peptides can be isolated from cells or tissue sources by an appropriate purification scheme using standard protein purification techniques.
  • Pep 133-related peptides are produced by recombinant DNA techniques.
  • a Pep 133-related peptide or polypeptide can be 5 synthesized chemically using standard peptide synthesis techniques
  • biologically active portions comprise a domain or motif with at least one activity of a Pep 133-related peptide.
  • a Pep 133-related peptide comprises a Pepl33- related-target binding region, a dibasic cleavage site, an amidation site, or a signal sequence.
  • a biologically active Pep 133-related peptide may, for example, comprise at least 1, 2, 3, or 5 10 amino acid changes from the sequence of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8, or may encode a biologically active Pep 133-related peptide comprising at least 1%, 2%, 3%, 5%, 8%, 10% or 15% changes in amino acids from the sequence of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8.
  • the Pep 133 -related peptide is substantially homologous to the i ' i , sequences .of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8, and retains the; functional activity of the Pep 133-related peptide, • • ,.15 i yet differs in amino acid sequence due to natural allelic variation or mutagenesis, as described .
  • the Pep 133-related peptide is a protein which Comprises an amino acid sequence which shares more than about 60% but less than 100% homology with the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8 and retains the functional activity of the Pep 133-related peptides of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8.
  • the protein is at least about 30%, 40%, 20 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 92%, 95%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 99.8% homologous to SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8, but is not identical to SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8.
  • the Pep 133-related peptide is less than identical (e.g. 100%, identity) to a naturally occurring Pepl33-related peptides. Percent homology can be determined as further detailed above.
  • the human Pepl33 gene is localized at chromosome lp35.
  • One aspect of the invention pertains to purified or isolated nucleic acid molecules that encode Pep 133-related peptides or biologically active portions thereof as further described herein, as well as nucleic acid fragments thereof.
  • Another aspect of the invention includes Pep 133-related nucleic acid sequences comprising 30 one or more splice sites or microsatellite sequences. Said nucleic acids may be used for example in therapeutic and diagnostic methods and in drug screening assays as further described herein.
  • An object of the invention is a purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid coding for a Pep 133-related peptide, complementary sequences thereto, and fragments thereof.
  • the invention also pertains to a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide having at least 95% 35 nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide coding for a Pep 133-related peptide, advantageously 99 % nucleotide identity, preferably 99.5% nucleotide identity and most preferably 99.8% nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide coding for a Pep 133-related peptide, or a sequence complementary thereto or a biologically active fragment thereof.
  • Another object of the invention relates to purified, isolated or recombinant nucleic acids comprising a polynucleotide that hybridizes, under the stringent 5 hybridization conditions defined herein, with a polynucleotide coding for a Pep 133-related peptide, or a sequence complementary thereto or a variant thereof or a biologically active fragment thereof.
  • the invention pertains to purified or isolated nucleic acid molecules that encode a portion or variant of a Pep 133-related peptide, wherein the portion or variant displays a Pep 133-related activity of the invention.
  • said portion or variant is of a 10 naturally occurring Pep 133 -related peptide
  • Another object of the invention is a purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid encoding a Pep 133-related peptide comprising, consisting essentially of, or consisting of the amino acidtician sequence of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8, or fragments thereof, wherein the isolated nucleic acid molecule , , , ⁇ decisions encodes one or more Pep 133,-related . peptide motifs.
  • the purified, isolated or • . .. x ⁇ 15 , recombinant nucleic acid may comprise a genomic DNA or fragment thereof which encodes the . polypeptide of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8 or a fragment thereof. Any combination of said motifs may also be specified.
  • the nucleotide sequence determined from the cloning of the Pep 133 gene allows for the generation of probes and primers designed for use in identifying and/or cloning other Pep 133-related 20 peptides family members (e.g. sharing the novel functional domains), as well as Pep 133 -related peptides homologues from other species.
  • a nucleic acid fragment encoding a "biologically active portion of a Pep 133-related peptide” can be prepared by isolating a portion of a nucleotide sequence coding for a Pep 133-related peptide, which encodes a polypeptide having a Pep 133-related peptides biological activity, expressing the 25 encoded portion of the Pep 133-related peptide (e.g., by recombinant expression in vitro or in vivo) and assessing the activity of the encoded portion of the Pep 133 -related peptide.
  • the invention further encompasses nucleic acid molecules that differ from the Pepl33- related nucleotide sequences of the invention due to degeneracy of the genetic code and encode the same Pep 133-related peptides and fragment of the invention. 30
  • DNA sequence polymorphisms that lead to changes in the amino acid sequences of the Pep 133-related peptides may exist within a population (e.g., the human population). Such genetic polymorphism may exist among individuals within a population due to natural allelic variation.
  • Such natural allelic variations can typically result in 1-5% variance in the 35 nucleotide sequence of the Pepl33 gene or nucleic acid sequence encoding Pep 133-related peptide.
  • Nucleic acid molecules corresponding to natural allelic variants and homologues of the Pep 133 -related nucleic acids of the invention can be isolated based on their homology to the Pep 133- related nucleic acids disclosed herein using the cDNAs disclosed herein, or a portion thereof, as a hybridization probe according to standard hybridization techniques under stringent hybridization 5 conditions.
  • the invention comprises polypeptides having an amino acid sequence encoded by any of the polynucleotides of the invention.
  • Pep 133-related peptides have various applications, including uses as hybridization probes, in chromosome and gene mapping, and in the generation of antisense RNA and DNA.
  • Pep 133-related peptides-encoding nucleic acids are useful as targets for pharmaceutical intervention, e.g. for the development of DNA -, • . '- .vaccines,. and for the preparation of Pep 133-related peptides by recombinant techniques, as described
  • the polynucleotides described-herein, including sequence variants thereof,' can be used in diagnostic assays. Accordingly, diagnostic methods based on detecting the presence of such - polynucleotides in body fluids or tissue samples are a feature of the present invention.
  • diagnostic methods based on detecting the presence of such - polynucleotides in body fluids or tissue samples are a feature of the present invention.
  • nucleic acid based diagnostic assays in accordance with the present invention include, but are not limited to, hybridization assays, e.g., in situ hybridization, and PCR-based assays.
  • probes and primers will be capable of detecting polynucleotide sequences, including genomic sequences that are similar, or complementary to, the Pep 133-related peptides polynucleotides described herein.
  • the invention includes primer pairs for carrying out a PCR to amplify a segment of a polynucleotide of the invention.
  • Each primer of a pair is an oligonucleotide having a length of between 15 and 30 nucleotides such that i) one primer of the pair forms a perfectly matched duplex with one strand of a polynucleotide of the invention and the other primer of the pair form a perfectly match duplex with the complementary strand of the same polynucleotide, and ii) the primers of a pair
  • each primer of a pair to its respective complementary sequence is substantially the same.
  • Hybridization probes derived from polynucleotides of the invention can be used, for example, in performing in situ hybridization on tissue samples, such as fixed or frozen tissue sections
  • a labeled DNA or RNA probe is allowed to bind its DNA or RNA target sample in the tissue section on a prepared microscopic, under controlled conditions.
  • dsDNA probes consisting of the DNA of interest cloned into a plasmid or bacteriophage DNA vector are used for this purpose, although ssDNA or ssRNA probes may also be used
  • Probes are generally oligonucleotides between about 15 and 40 nucleotides in length
  • the probes can be polynucleotide probes generated by PCR random priming primer extension or in vitro transcription of RNA from plasmids (riboprobes).
  • the probes can be labeled by any of a number of label groups and the particular detection method will correspond to the type of label utilized on the probe (e.g., autoradiography, X-ray detection, fluorescent or visual microscopic analysis, as appropriate).
  • the reaction can be further amplified in situ using immunocytochemical techniques directed against the label of the detector molecule used, such antibodies directed to a fluorescein moiety present on a fluorescently labeled probe, or against avidin, or marker enzymes (peroxidase, •, alkaline phosphatase)
  • Specific labelling and in situ detection methods can be found, for example, in v ; Howard, G.
  • Hybridization probes and PCR primers may also be selected from the genomic sequences corresponding to the full-length proteins identified in accordance with the present invention, including promoter, enhancer elements and introns of the gene encoding the naturally occurring polypeptide.
  • Nucleotide sequences encoding a Pep 133-related peptide can also be used to construct hybridization probes for mapping the gene which encodes Pep 133-related peptides and for the genetic analysis of individuals.
  • the nucleotide sequences provided herein may be mapped to a chromosome and specific regions of a chromosome using known techniques, such as in situ hybridization, linkage analysis against known chromosomal markers, and hybridization screening with libraries.
  • sequences can be mapped to chromosomes by preparing PCR primers (preferably 15-25 bp) from the Pep 133-related peptides cDNA. Computer analysis of the 3' untranslated region is used to rapidly select primers that do not span more than one exon in the genomic DNA, which would complicate the amplification process. Individuals carrying variations of, or mutations in the gene encoding a Pep 133-related peptide of the present invention may be detected at the DNA level by a variety of techniques. Nucleic acids used for diagnosis may be obtained from a patient's cells, including, for example, tissue biopsy and autopsy material.
  • Genomic DNA may be used directly for detection or may be amplified enzymatically by using PCR (Saiki, et al. Nature 324: 163-166 (1986)) prior to analysis.
  • RNA or cDNA may also be used for the same purpose.
  • PCR primers complementary to the nucleic acid of the present invention can be used to identify and analyze mutations in the gene of the present invention. Deletions and insertions can be detected by a change in size of the amplified product in comparison to the normal genotype. Point mutations can be identified by hybridizing amplified DNA to radiolabeled RNA of the invention or alternatively, radiolabeled antisense DNA sequences of the invention.
  • Sequence changes at specific locations may also be revealed by nuclease protection assays, such RNase and SI protection or the chemical cleavage method (e.g. Cotton, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85 4397- 4401 (1985)), or by differences in melting temperatures. "Molecular beacons” (Kostrikis L. G. et al , Science 279:1228-1229 (1998)), hairpin-shaped, single-stranded synthetic oligonucleotides containing probe sequences which are complementary to the nucleic acid of the present invention, may also be used to detect point mutations or other sequence changes as well as monitor expression levels of Pep 133 -related peptides.
  • Oligonucleotides of the invention are •• ' ⁇ synthesized by conventional means on a commercially available automated DNA synthesizer, e.g. an
  • phosphoramidite chemistry is employed, e.g. as disclosed in the following references. Beaucage and Iyer, Tetrahedron, 48: 2223-231 1 (1992); Molko et al, U S. patent 4,980,460; Koster et al, U.S. patent 4,725,677; Caruthers et al, U.S. patents 4,415,732; 4,458,066; and 4,973,679.
  • nuclease resistant backbones are preferred.
  • Many types of modified oligonucleotides are available that confer nuclease resistance, e.g. phosphorothioate,
  • the antisense oligonucleotides of the invention have lengths in the range of about 15 to 40 nucleotides. More preferably, the
  • oligonucleotide moieties have lengths in the range of about 18 to 25 nucleotides.
  • Primers and probes of the invention can be prepared by any suitable method, including, for example, cloning and restriction of appropriate sequences and direct chemical synthesis by a method 35 such as the phosphodiester method of Narang SA et al (Methods Enzymol 1979;68:90-98), the phosphodiester method of Brown EL et al (Methods Enzymol 1979;68 109-151), the diethylphosphoramidite method of Beaucage et al (Tetrahedron Lett 1981, 22- 1859-1862) and the solid support method described in EP 0 707 592.
  • a method 35 such as the phosphodiester method of Narang SA et al (Methods Enzymol 1979;68:90-98), the phosphodiester method of Brown EL et al (Methods Enzymol 1979;68 109-151), the diethylphosphoramidite method of Beaucage et al (Tetrahedron Lett 1981, 22
  • Detection probes are generally nucleic acid sequences or uncharged nucleic acid analogs such as, for example peptide nucleic acids which are disclosed in WO 92/20702, morpholino analogs which are described in U.S. Patents 5,185,444, 5,034,506 and 5, 142,047.
  • the probe may be rendered "non-extendable" in that additional dNTPs cannot be added to the probe
  • nucleic acid probes can be rendered non- extendable by modifying the 3' end of the probe such that the hydroxyl group is no longer capable of participating in elongation.
  • the 3' end of the probe can be functionalized with the capture or detection label to thereby consume or otherwise block the hydroxyl group.
  • any of the polynucleotides of the present invention can be labeled, if desired, by incorporating any label group known in the art to be detectable by spectroscopic, photochemical, biochemical, 'êt 10 immunochemical, or chemical means. Additional examples include non-radioactive labelling of ; - ., nucleic acid fragments as described in Urdea et al .(Nucleic Acids. Research 1 L4937-4957, 1988)-or ., • Sanchez-Pescador et al. (J. Clin. Microbiol. 26(10).1934-1938, 1988).
  • the probes according to the present invention may have structural characteristics such that they allow the signal amplification, such structural characteristics being, for example, branched DNA probes as those described by Urdea et al (Nucleic Acids Symp. Ser. 24:197-200, 1991) or in the European patent No. EP 0225807 (Chiron).
  • a label can also be used to capture the primer, so as to facilitate the immobilization of either the primer or a primer extension product, such as amplified DNA, on a solid support.
  • a capture label is attached to the primers or probes and can be a specific binding member which forms a binding pair with the solid's phase reagent's specific binding member (e.g. biotin and streptavidin). Therefore depending upon the type of label carried by a polynucleotide or a probe, it may be employed to capture or to detect the target DNA.
  • the polynucleotides, primers or probes provided herein may, themselves, serve as the capture label
  • a solid phase reagent's binding member is a nucleic acid sequence
  • it may be selected such that it binds a complementary portion of a primer or probe to thereby immobilize the primer or probe to the solid phase
  • the probe will contain a sequence or "tail" that is not complementary to the target.
  • a polynucleotide primer itself serves as the capture label
  • at least a portion of the primer will be free to hybridize with a nucleic acid on a solid phase.
  • DNA labelling techniques are well known to the skilled technician.
  • the probes of the present invention are useful for a number of purposes. They can be notably used in Southern hybridization to genomic DNA The probes can also be used to detect PCR amplification products. They may also be used to detect mismatches in Pepl33-encoding genes or mRNA using other techniques.
  • any of the nucleic acids, polynucleotides, primers and probes of the present invention can be 5 conveniently immobilized on a solid support.
  • Solid supports are known to those skilled in the art and include the walls of wells of a reaction tray, test tubes, polystyrene beads, magnetic beads, nitrocellulose strips, membranes, microparticles such as latex particles, sheep (or other animal) red blood cells, duracytes and others
  • the solid support is not critical and can be selected by one skilled in the art.
  • a solid support refers to any material which is insoluble, or can be made insoluble by a subsequent reaction.
  • the solid phase can- retain an additional receptor which has the ability to attract and • immobilize the capture reagent.
  • the additional receptor can include a charged substance that is oppositely charged with respect to the capture reagent itself or to a charged substance conjugated to the capture reagent.
  • the receptor molecule can be any specific binding member attached to the solid support and which has the ability to immobilize the capture reagent
  • the receptor molecule enables the indirect binding of the capture reagent to a solid support material before the performance of the assay or during the performance of the assay.
  • the solid phase thus can be a plastic, derivatized plastic, magnetic or non-magnetic metal, glass or silicon surface of a test tube, microtiter well, sheet, bead, microparticle, chip, sheep (or other suitable animal's) red blood cells, duracytes and other configurations known to
  • nucleic acids, polynucleotides, primers and probes of the invention can be attached to or immobilized on a solid support individually or in groups of at least 2, 5, 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, or 25 distinct polynucleotides of the invention to a single solid support.
  • polynucleotides other than those of the invention may be attached to the same solid support as one or more polynucleotides of the invention.
  • any polynucleotide provided herein may be attached in overlapping areas or at random locations on a solid support.
  • the polynucleotides of the invention may be attached in an ordered array wherein each polynucleotide is attached to a distinct region of the solid support which does not overlap with the attachment site of any other polynucleotide.
  • such an ordered array of polynucleotides is designed to be "addressable" where the distinct locations are recorded and
  • Addressable polynucleotide arrays typically comprise a plurality of different oligonucleotide probes that are coupled to a surface of a substrate in different known locations. The knowledge of the precise location of each polynucleotides location makes these "addressable" arrays particularly useful in hybridization assays. Any addressable array technology known in the art can be employed with the polynucleotides of the invention. One particular embodiment of these polynucleotide arrays is known as the Genechips, and has been generally described in US Patent 5,143,854; PCT publications WO 90/15070 and 92/10092
  • Pep 133-related peptides sequences that may exist in the population, the skilled artisan will appreciate that changes can be introduced by mutation into the nucleotide sequences coding for Pep 133-related peptides, thereby leading to changes in the amino acid sequence of the encoded Pep 133-related peptides, with or without altering the functional ability of the Pep 133-related peptides.
  • variants including 1) one in which one or more of the amino acid residues are substituted with a conserved or non-conserved amino acid residue " and such substituted amino acid residue may or may not be one encoded by the genetic code, or 2) one in which one or more of the amino acid residues includes a substitiient group, or 3) one in which the mutated Pep 133-related peptide is fused with another compound, such as a compound to increase the half-life of the polypeptide (for example, polyethylene glycol), or 4) one in which the additional amino acids are fused to the mutated Pep 133-related peptide, such as a leader or signal-anchor sequence or a sequence which is employed for purification of the mutated Pep 133-related peptide or a preprotein sequence.
  • Such variants are deemed to be within the scope of those skilled in the art.
  • nucleotide substitutions leading to amino acid substitutions can be made in the sequences that do not substantially change the biological activity of the protein.
  • amino acid residues that are conserved among the Pep 133-related peptides of the present invention are predicted to be less amenable to alteration.
  • the invention pertains to nucleic acid molecules encoding Pep 133-related peptides, or biologically active fragments or homologues thereof that contain changes in amino acid residues that are not essential for activity.
  • Such Pep 133-related peptides differ in amino acid sequence from SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8 yet retain biological activity
  • the isolated nucleic acid molecule comprises a nucleotide sequence encoding a protein, wherein the protein comprises an amino acid sequence at least about 60% homologous to an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8.
  • the protein encoded by the nucleic acid molecule is at least about 65-70% homologous to an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8, more preferably sharing at least about 75-80% identity with an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8, even more preferably sharing at least about 85%, 90%, 92%, 95%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 99.8% identity with an 5 amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8.
  • the invention pertains to nucleic acid molecules encoding Pep 133-related peptides that contain changes in amino acid residues that result in increased biological activity, or a modified biological activity. In another aspect, the invention pertains to nucleic acid molecules encoding Pep 133-related peptides that contain changes in amino acid residues that are essential for a
  • Pep 133 -related activity Such Pep 133-related peptides differ in amino acid sequence from SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8 and display reduced activity, or essentially lack one or more Pep 133 -related peptides biological activities. Mutations can be introduced into any of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8, by standard techniques, such as site-directed mutagenesis and PCR-mediated mutagenesis. For example,
  • conservative amino acid substitutions may be made at one or more predicted non-essential amino acids
  • a "conservative amino acid substitution” is one in which the amino acid residue is replaced with an amino acid residue having a similar side chain.
  • Families of amino acid residues having similar side chains have been defined in the art These families include amino acids with basic side chains (e.g., lysine, arginine, histidine), acidic side chains (e.g., aspartic acid, glutamic acid), uncharged polar side chains (e.g., glycine, asparagine, glutamine, serine, threonine, tyrosine,
  • cysteine nonpolar side chains (e g., alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, proline, phenylalanine, methionine, tryptophan), beta-branched side chains (e.g., threonine, valine, isoleucine) and aromatic side chains (e.g., tyrosine, phenylalanine, tryptophan, histidine)
  • nonpolar side chains e.g., alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, proline, phenylalanine, methionine, tryptophan
  • beta-branched side chains e.g., threonine, valine, isoleucine
  • aromatic side chains e.g., tyrosine, phenylalanine, tryptophan, histidine
  • mutations can be introduced randomly along all or part of a Pep 133-related peptides coding sequence, such as by saturation mutagenesis, and the resultant mutants can be screened for Pep 133-related peptides biological activity to identify mutants that retain activity.
  • the encoded protein can be expressed recombinantly and the activity of the protein can be determined.
  • the invention also provides Pep 133-related chimeric or fusion proteins.
  • Pep 133-related "chimeric protein” or “fusion protein” comprises a Pep 133-related peptide of the invention or fragment thereof, operatively linked, preferably fused in frame, to a non-Pep 133-related peptide
  • a Pep 133-related fusion protein comprises at least one biologically active portion of a Pep 133-related peptide
  • a Pep 133-related fusion protein comprises at least one biologically active portion of a Pep 133-related peptide.
  • 35 related fusion protein comprises at least two biologically active portions of a Pep 133-related peptide.
  • the fusion protein is a GST-Pep 133-related fusion protein in which a Pep 133-related domain sequences are fused to the C-terminus of the GST sequences.
  • Such fusion proteins can facilitate the purification of recombinant Pep 133-related peptides.
  • the fusion protein is a Pep 133-related peptide containing a heterologous signal sequence 5 at its N-terminus, such as for example to allow for a desired cellular localization in a certain host cell.
  • the Pep 133-related fusion proteins of the invention can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions and administered to a subject in vivo Moreover, the Pep 133-related fusion proteins of the invention can be used as immunogens to produce anti-Pep 133-related antibodies in a subject, to
  • isolated peptidyl portions of the subject Pep 133-related peptides can also be obtained by screening peptides recombinantly- produced from the corresponding fragment of the :!. " • , nucleic acid encoding such peptides.
  • fragments can be chemically synthesized' using ⁇
  • a Pep 133-related peptide of the present invention may be arbitrarily divided into fragments of desired length with no overlap of the fragments, or preferably divided into overlapping fragments of a desired length.
  • the fragments can be produced (recombinantly or by chemical synthesis) and tested to identify those peptidyl fragments which can function as either agonists or
  • peptidyl portions of a Pep 133-related peptide such as a Pep 133- related target binding region, can be tested for Pepl33-related activity by expression as thioredoxin fusion proteins, each of which contains a discrete fragment of the Pep 133-related peptide (U.S. Patents 5, 270, 181 and 5,292,646 and W094/02502).
  • the present invention also pertains to variants of the Pep 133-related peptides which function as either agonists or antagonists of Pep 133-related peptides.
  • Variants of the Pep 133-related peptides can be generated by mutagenesis, e.g., discrete point mutation or truncation of a Pep 133-related peptide.
  • An agonist of a Pep 133-related peptide can retain substantially the same, or a subset, of the biological activities of the naturally occurring form of a Pep 133-related peptide
  • Pep 133-related peptide can inhibit one or more of the activities of the naturally occurring form of the Pep 133-related peptide by, for example, competitively inhibiting the association of Pep 133-related peptide with a Pep 133-related target molecule.
  • specific biological effects can be elicited by treatment with a variant of limited function.
  • variants of a Pep 133-related peptide which function as either Pep 133-related peptides agonists (mimetics) or as Pep 133-related peptides
  • 35 antagonists can be identified by screening combinatorial libraries of mutants, e.g , truncation mutants, of a Pep 133-related peptide for Pep 133-related peptide agonist or antagonist activity.
  • a variegated library of Pep 133-related peptides variants is generated by combinatorial mutagenesis at the nucleic acid level and is encoded by a variegated gene library.
  • a variegated library of Pep 133-related peptides variants can be produced by, for example, 5 enzymatically ligating a mixture of synthetic oligonucleotides into gene sequences such that a degenerate set of potential Pep 133-related peptides sequences is expressible as individual polypeptides, or alternatively, as a set of larger fusion proteins (e.g., for phage display) containing the set of Pep 133-related peptides sequences therein.
  • oligonucleotide sequence 10 oligonucleotide sequence.
  • Chemical synthesis of a degenerate gene sequence can be performed in an automatic DNA synthesizer, and the synthetic gene then ligated into an appropriate expression vector.
  • Use of a degenerate set of genes allows for the provision, in one mixture, of all of the . sequences encoding the desired set of potential Pep 133 -related peptides sequences . :'.'--.'. ⁇ X---: x ' i .
  • libraries of fragments of a Pep.l33-related peptide coding sequence can be used : 15 ' -. , to generate a variegated population of Pep 133-related peptides.
  • a library of coding sequence fragments can be generated by treating a double stranded PCR fragment of Pep 133-related peptides coding sequence with a nuclease under conditions wherein nicking occurs only about once per. molecule, denaturing the double stranded DNA, renaturing the DNA to form double stranded
  • an expression library can be derived which encodes N-terminal, C-terminal and internal fragments of various sizes of the Pep 133-related peptide.
  • Modified Pep 133-related peptides can be used for such purposes as enhancing therapeutic or prophylactic efficacy, or stability (e.g., ex vivo shelf life and resistance to proteolytic degradation in vivo).
  • Such modified peptides when designed to retain at least one activity of the naturally occurring form of the protein, are considered functional equivalents of the Pep 133-related peptide described in more detail herein.
  • Such modified peptide can be produced, for instance, by amino acid substitution,
  • Whether a change in die amino acid sequence of a peptide results in a functional Pep 133- related peptides homologue can be readily determined by assessing a Pep 133-related peptide biological activity of the variant peptide. Peptides in which more than one replacement has taken place can readily be tested in the same manner.
  • This invention further contemplates a method of generating sets of combinatorial mutants of the presently disclosed Pep 133-related peptides, as well as truncation and fragmentation mutants, and is especially useful for identifying potential variant sequences which differ from a wild-type form by, for example, efficacy, potency and/or intracellular half-life.
  • One purpose for screening such combinatorial libraries is to isolate novel Pep 133-related peptide homologues, which modulate the biological activities of the wild-type protein, or alternatively, possess novel activities all together.
  • mutagenesis can give rise to Pep 133-related peptide homologues which have intracellular half-lives dramatically different than the corresponding wild-type protein
  • the altered protein can be rendered either more stable or less stable to proteolytic degradation or cellular processes which result in destruction or inactivation of a Pep 133-related peptide.
  • Such Pep 133-related peptide homologues. and the genes which encode them can be utilized to alter the envelope of expression for a particular recombinant Pep 133-related peptides by modulating the half-life of the recombinant protein. For instance, a short half-life can give rise to more transient biological effects associated with a particular recombinant Pep 133-related peptide and, when part of an inducible expression system, can
  • allow tighter control of recombinant protein levels within a cell.
  • proteins, and ⁇ , . • particularly their recombinant nucleic acid constructs can be used in gene therapy protocols.
  • the amino acid sequences for a population of Pep 133-related peptide homologues or other related proteins are aligned, preferably to promote the highest homology possible.
  • a population of variants can include, for example, Pep 133-related peptides homologues from one or more species, or Pep 133-related peptides homologues from the same species but which differ due to mutation. Amino acids at each position of the aligned sequences are selected to create a degenerate set of combinatorial sequences.
  • the library of potential Pep 133-related peptides homologues can be generated from a degenerate oligonucleotide sequence
  • Chemical synthesis of a degenerate gene sequence can be carried out in an automatic DNA synthesizer, and the synthetic genes then be ligated into an appropriate gene for expression.
  • the purpose of a degenerate set of genes is to provide, in one mixture, all of the sequences encoding the desired set of potential Pep 133 -related peptides sequences.
  • the synthesis of degenerate oligonucleotides is well known in the art (Narang, SA (1983) Tetrahedron 393; Itakura et al.
  • Pep 133-related peptide homologues can be generated and isolated from a library by screening using, for example, alanine scanning mutagenesis (Ruf et al. (1994) Biochemistry 33: 1565-1572, Wang et al. (1994) J Biol Chem.
  • a wide range of techniques are known in the art for screening gene products of -. combinatorial libraries made by point mutations, as well as for screening cDNA libraries for gene products having a certain property. Such techniques will be generally adaptable for rapid screening ,, of the gene libraries generated by the combinatorial mutagenesis of Pep 133-related peptides.
  • the • most widely used techniques for screening large gene libraries typically comprises cloning the gene library into replicable expression vectors, transforming appropriate cells with the resulting library of vectors, and expressing the combinatorial genes under conditions in which detection of a desired activity facilitates relatively easy isolation of the vector encoding the gene whose product was detected.
  • each of the illustrative assays described below are amenable to high throughput analysis as necessary to screen large numbers of degenerate Pep 133-related peptides sequences created by combinatorial mutagenesis techniques.
  • the candidate gene products are displayed on the surface of a cell or viral particle, and the ability of particular cells or viral particles to bind a Pep 133-related target molecule (for example a modified peptide substrate) via this gene product is detected in a "panning assay".
  • the gene library can be cloned into the gene for a surface membrane protein of a bacterial cell, and the resulting fusion protein detected by panning (Ladner et al., WO 88/06630; Fuchs et al. (1991) BioTechnology 9: 1370-1371, and Goward et al. ( 1992) TIBS 18: 136 140).
  • fluorescently labeled Pep 133-related target can be used to score for potentially functional Pep 133-related peptide homologues.
  • Cells can be visually inspected and separated under a fluorescence microscope, or, where the morphology of the cell permits, separated by a fluorescence- activated cell sorter.
  • the gene library is expressed as a fusion protein on the surface of a viral particle
  • foreign peptide sequences can be expressed on the surface of infectious phage, thereby conferring two significant benefits.
  • phage can be applied to affinity matrices at very high concentrations, a large number of phage can be screened at one time.
  • each infectious phage displays the combinatorial gene product on its surface, if a particular phage is recovered from an affinity matrix in low yield, the phage can be amplified by another round of infection. The group of almost identical E.
  • coli filamentous phages 5 Ml 3, fd, and fl are most often used in phage display libraries, as either of the phage gill or gVIII coat proteins can be used to generate fusion proteins without disrupting the ultimate packaging of the viral particle (Ladner et al. PCT publication WO 90/02909; Garrard et al., PCT publication WO 92/09690; Marks et al. (1992) J Biol. Chem. 267: 16007-16010; Griffiths et al. (1993) EMBO J 12:725-734; Clackson et al. (1991) Nature 352:624-628; and Barbas et al. (1992) PNAS 89 4457
  • the recombinant phage antibody system (RPAS, Pharmacia Catalog number 27-9400-01) can be easily modified for use in expressing Pep 133-related peptide combinatorial libraries, and the Pep 133-related peptide phage library can be panned on immobilized Pep 133-related target molecule (glutathione immobilized Pep 133-related peptides target-GST fusion
  • the invention also provides for identification and reduction to functional minimal size of the Pep 133 -related peptide functional domains to generate mimetics.
  • mutagenic techniques as 0 described above are also useful to map the determinants of Pep 133-related peptides, which participate in protein-protein interactions involved in, for example, binding to a Pep 133-related target protein.
  • the critical residues of a Pep 133-related peptide which are involved in molecular recognition of the Pep 133-related target can be determined and used to generate Pepl33- related peptides target- 13P-derived peptidomimetics that competitively inhibit binding of the Pepl33- 5 related peptide to the Pep 133-related peptides target.
  • peptidomimetic compounds can be generated which mimic those residues in binding to a Pep 133-related peptides target, and which, by inhibiting binding of the Pep 133 -related peptide to the Pep 133-related target molecule, can interfere with the function of a 0 Pep 133-related peptide in transcriptional regulation of one or more genes.
  • non hydrolyzable peptide analogs of such residues can be generated using retro-inverse peptides (e.g., U.S.
  • Solid Phase Peptide Synthesis 2nd Ed. (Pierce Chemical Company, Rockford, IL, 1984).
  • a commercial peptide synthesizer is used, e.g. Applied Biosystems, Inc. (Foster City, CA) model 430A, and polypeptides of the invention may be assembled from multiple, separately synthesized and purified, peptide in a convergent synthesis approach, e.g. Kent et al, U S. patent t , 6, 184,344 and Dawson and Kent, Annu. Rev ; Biochem., 69: 923-960 (2000).
  • Peptides of the , , , invention may be assembled by solid phase synthesis on a cross-linked polystyrene support starting from the carboxyl terminal residue and adding amino acids in a stepwise fashion until the entire peptide has been formed.
  • the following references are guides to the chemistry employed during synthesis: Schnolzer et al, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res., 40: 180-193 (1992); Merrifield, J. Amer. Chem. Soc. Vol. 85, pg. 2149 (1963); Kent et al., pg 185, in Peptides 1984, Ragnarsson, Ed.
  • a first peptide fragment is provided with an N-terminal cysteine having an unoxidized sulfhydryl side chain
  • a second peptide fragment is provided with a C-terminal thioester.
  • the unoxidized sulfhydryl side chain of the N-terminal cysteine is then condensed with the C-terminal thioester to produce an intermediate peptide fragment which links the first and second peptide fragments with a ⁇ -aminothioester bond.
  • the N-terminal cysteines of internal fragments are protected from undesired cyclization and concatenation reactions by a cyclic thiazolidine protecting group as described below
  • a cyclic thiazolidme protecting group is a thioprolinyl group.
  • Peptide fragments having a C -terminal thioester may be produced as described in the following references, which are inco ⁇ orated by reference: Kent et al, U.S. patent 6, 184,344; Tam et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 92: 12485-12489 (1995); Blake, Int J. Peptide Protein Res , 17: 273 (1981); Canne et al, Tetrahedron Letters, 36: 1217-1220 (1995); hackeng et al, Proc Natl. Acad. Sci.. 94 7845-7850 ( 1997); or Hackeng et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci , 96.
  • peptide fragments are synthesized on a solid phase support (described below) typically on a 0.25 mmol scale by using the in situ neutralization/HBTU activation procedure for Boc chemistry disclosed by Schnolzer et al. Int J. Peptide Protein Res., 40: 180-193 (1992), which reference is incorporated herein by reference.
  • HBTU is 2-(lH-benzotriazol-l-yl)-l,l,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate and Boc is " tert-butoxycarbonyl).
  • Each synthetic cycle consists of N ⁇ -Boc removal by a 1- to' 2- minute' ' '- treatment with neat TFA, a 1-minute DMF flow wash, a 10- to 20-minute coupling time with 1.0 mmol of preactivated Boc-amino acid in the presence of DIEA, and a second DMF flow wash.
  • TFA trifluoroacetic acid
  • DMF is N,N-dimethylformamide
  • DIEA is N,N- diisopropylethylamine
  • N ⁇ -Boc-amino acids (1.1 mmol) are preactivated for 3 minutes with 1.0 mmol of HBTU (0.5 M in DMF) in the presence of excess DIEA (3 mmol).
  • yields are determined by measuring residual free amine with a conventional quantitative ninhydrin assay, e.g. as disclosed in Sarin et al, Anal. Biochem., 1 17: 147-157 (1981).
  • a DCM flow wash is used before and after deprotection by using TFA, to prevent possible high-temperature (TFA/DMF)-catalyzed pyrrolidone formation.
  • TFA high-temperature
  • dnp 2,4-dinitrophenyl
  • N -Boc-Leu (4 mmol) is activated with 3.6 mmol of HBTU in the presence of 6 mmol of DIEA and coupled for 16 minutes to 2 mmol of p-methylbenzhydrylamine (MBHA) resin, or the equivalent
  • MBHA p-methylbenzhydrylamine
  • 3 mmol of S-trityl mercaptopropionic acid is activated with 2.7 mmol of HBTU in the presence of 6 mmol of DIEA and coupled for 16 minutes to Leu-MBHA resin.
  • the resulting TAMPAL resin can be used as a starting resin for polypeptide-chain assembly after removal of the trityl protecting group with two 1 -minute treatments with 3.5% triisopropylsilane and 2.5% H 2 0 in TFA.
  • the thioester bond can be formed with any desired amino acid by using standard in situ-neutralization peptide coupling protocols for 1 hour, as disclosed in Schnolzer et al (cited above) Treatment of the final peptide fragment with anhydrous HF yields the C-terminal activated mercaptopropionic acid-leucine (MPAL) thioester peptide fragments
  • thiazolidine-protected thioester peptide fragment intermediates are used in native chemical ligation under conditions as described by Hackeng et al (1999), or like conditions. Briefly, 0.1 M phosphate buffer (pH 8.5) containing 6 M guanidine, 4% (vol/vol) benzylmercaptan, and 4% (vol/vol) thiophenol is added to dry peptides to be ligated, to give a final peptide concentration of 1-3 mM at about pH 7, lowered because of the addition of thiols and TFA from the lyophilized peptide
  • the ligation reaction is performed in a heating block at 37°C and is periodically vortexed to equilibrate the thiol additives. The reaction may be monitored for degree of completion by ; MALDI-MS or HPLC and electrospray ionizatioh MS ⁇ ' • ' -' * ⁇ " ⁇ . :
  • the N-terminal thiazolidine ring of the product is opened by treatment with a cysteine deprotecting agent, such as O- methylhydroxylamine (0.5 M) at pH 3.5-4.5 for 2 hours at 37° C , after which a 10-fold excess of Tris-(2-carboxyethyl)-phosphine is added to the reaction mixture to completely reduce any oxidizing reaction constituents prior to purification of the product by conventional preparative HPLC
  • fractions containing the ligation product are identified by electrospray MS, are pooled, and lyophilized
  • the final polypeptide product may be refolded by conventional techniques, e.g. Creighton, Meth. Enzymol, 107: 305-329 (1984); White, Meth. Enzymol., 1 1 : 481-484 (1967), Wetlaufer, Meth. Enzymol., 107' 301-304 (1984); and the like.
  • a final product is refolded by air oxidation by the following, or like:
  • the reduced lyophilized product is dissolved (at about 0.1 mg/mL) in 1 M guanidine hydrochloride (or like chaotropic agent) with 100 mM Tris, 10 mM methionine, at pH 8.6. After gentle overnight stirring, the re-folded product is isolated by reverse phase HPLC with conventional protocols.
  • the polynucleotide sequences described herein can be used in recombinant DNA molecules that direct the expression of the corresponding polypeptides in appropriate host cells. Because of the degeneracy in the genetic code, other DNA sequences may encode the equivalent amino acid sequence, and may be used to clone and express the Pep 133-related peptides. Codons preferred by a particular host cell may be selected and substituted into the naturally occurring nucleotide sequences, to increase the rate and/or efficiency of expression.
  • the nucleic acid e.g., cDNA or genomic DNA
  • encoding the desired Pep 133-related peptide may be inserted into a replicable vector for cloning (amplification of the DNA), or for expression.
  • the polypeptide can be expressed recombinantly in any of a number of expression systems according to methods known in the art (Ausubel, et al., editors, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1990).
  • Appropriate host cells include yeast, bacteria, archebacteria, fungi, and insect and animal cells, including mammalian cells, for example primary cells, including stem cells, including, but not limited to bone marrow stem cells. More specifically, these include, but are not limited to, microorganisms such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage, plasmid or cosmid DNA expression vectors, and yeast transformed with yeast expression vectors.
  • insect cells infected with a recombinant insect virus such as baculovirus
  • mammalian expression systems The nucleic acid sequence to be expressed may be inserted into the vector by a variety of procedures. In general, DNA is inserted into an appropriate restriction endonuclease site using techniques known in the art.
  • Vector components generally include, but are not limited to, one or more of a signal sequence, an origin of replication, one or more marker genes, an enhancer element, a promoter, and a transcription termination sequence. Construction of suitable vectors containing one or more of these components employs standard ligation techniques known to the skilled artisan.
  • the Pep 133-related peptides of the present invention are produced by culturing a host cell transformed with an expression vector containing a nucleic acid encoding Pep 133 -related peptides, under the appropriate conditions to induce or cause expression of the protein.
  • the conditions appropriate for Pep 133-related peptide expression will vary with the choice of the expression vector and the host cell, and will be easily ascertained by one skilled in the art through routine experimentation
  • the use of constitutive promoters in the expression vector will require optimizing the growth and proliferation of the host cell, while the use of an inducible promoter requires the appropriate growth conditions for induction.
  • the timing of the harvest is important.
  • the baculoviral systems used in insect cell expression are lytic viruses, and thus harvest time selection can be crucial for product yield.
  • a host cell strain may be chosen for its ability to modulate the expression of the inserted sequences or to process the expressed protein in the desired fashion. Such modifications of the protein include, but are not limited to, acetylation, carboxylation, glycosylation, phosphorylation, lipidation and acylation. Post-translational processing, which cleaves a "prepro" form of the protein, may also be important for correct insertion, folding and/or function.
  • host cells such as CHO, HeLa, BHK, MDCK, 293, W138, etc. have specific cellular machinery and characteristic mechanisms for such post-translational activities and may be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the introduced, foreign protein.
  • Drosoph ⁇ a melangaster cells Saccharomyces cerevisiae and other yeasts
  • E. coli Bacillus subtilis, SF9 cells, C129 cells, 293 cells, Neurospora, BHK, CHO, COS, and HeLa cells, fibroblasts, Schwanoma cell lines, immortalized mammalian myeloid and lymphoid cell lines, Jukat cells, human 5 cells and other primary cells.
  • nucleic acid encoding a Pep 133-related peptide must be "operably linked” by placing it into a functional relationship with another nucleic acid sequence.
  • DNA for a presequence or secretory leader is operably linked to DNA for a polypeptide if it is expressed as a preprotein that participates in the secretion of the polypeptide; a promoter or enhancer is operably
  • a ribosome binding site is operably linked to a coding sequence if it is positioned so as to facilitate translation.
  • "operably linked" DNA sequences are contiguous, and, in the case of a secretory leader, contiguous
  • Promoter sequences encode either constitutive or inducible promoters.
  • the promoters may be either naturally occurring promoters or hybrid promoters. Hybrid promoters, which combine elements of more than one promoter, are also known in the art, and are useful in the present invention.
  • the expression vector may comprise additional elements, for example, the expression vector may have two replication
  • Both expression and cloning vectors contain a nucleic acid sequence that enables the vector to replicate in one or more selected host cells. Such sequences are well known for a variety of bacteria, yeast, and viruses.
  • the origin of replication from the plasmid pBR322 is suitable for most Gram-negative bacteria, the 2:
  • 25 plasmid origin is suitable for yeast, and various viral origins (SV40, polyoma, adenovirus, VSV or BPV) are useful for cloning vectors in mammalian cells.
  • the expression vector contains at least one sequence homologous to the host cell genome, and preferably, two homologous sequences which flank the expression construct.
  • the integrating vector may be directed to a specific locus in the host cell by selecting the appropriate homologous sequence
  • the expression vector contains a selectable marker gene to allow the selection of transformed host cells.
  • Selection genes are well known in the art and will vary with the host cell used.
  • Expression and cloning vectors will typically contain a selection gene, also termed a selectable marker.
  • Typical selection genes encode proteins that (a) confer resistance to antibiotics or other
  • 35 toxins e.g., ampicillin, neomycin, methotrexate, or tetracycline, (b) complement auxotrophic deficiencies, or (c) supply critical nutrients not available for from complex media, e.g , the gene encoding D-alanine racemase for Bacilli.
  • Host cells transformed with a nucleotide sequence encoding a Pep 133-related peptide may be cultured under conditions suitable for the expression and recovery of the encoded protein from cell culture
  • the protein produced by a recombinant cell may be secreted, membrane-bound, or contained intracellularly depending on the sequence and/or the vector used.
  • expression vectors containing polynucleotides encoding the Pepl 33-related peptides can be designed with signal sequences which direct secretion of the Pep 133-related peptides through a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell membrane.
  • the desired Pep 133-related peptide may be produced recombinantly not only directly, but also as a fusion polypeptide with a heteroiogous polypeptide, which may be a signal sequence or other polypeptide having a specific cleavage site at the N- terminus of the mature protein or polypeptide.
  • the signal sequence may be a component of the vector, or it may be a part of the Pep 133-related peptides-encoding DNA that is inserted into the vector.
  • the signal sequence may be a prokaryotic signal sequence selected, for example, from the ' group of the alkaline phosphatase, penicillinase, lpp, or heat-stable enterotoxin II leaders.
  • the signal sequence may be, e.g., the yeast invertase leader, alpha factor leader (including Saccharomyces and Kluyveromyces a-factor leaders, the latter described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,010,182), or acid phosphatase leader, the C albicans glucoamylase leader (EP 362,179 published Apr 4, 1990), or the signal described in WO 90113646 published Nov. 15, 1990.
  • mammalian signal sequences may be used to direct secretion of the protein, such as signal sequences from secreted polypeptides of the same or related species, as well as viral secretory leaders.
  • the coding sequence is inserted into an appropriate vector, which in turn may require the presence of certain characteristic "control elements” or “regulatory sequences " Appropriate constructs are known generally in the art (Ausubel, et al., 1990) and, in many cases, are available from commercial suppliers such as Invitrogen (San Diego, Calif), Stratagene (La Jolla, Calif), Gibco BRL (Rockville, Md.) or Clontech (Palo Alto, Calif )
  • Transformation of bacterial cells may be achieved using an inducible promoter such as the hybrid lacZ promoter of the "BLUESCRIPT" Phagemid (Stratagene) or "pSPORTl” (Gibco BRL)
  • a number of expression vectors may be selected for use in bacterial cells to produce cleavable fusion proteins that can be easily detected and/or purified, including, but not limited to "BLUESCRIPT” (a-galactosidase, Stratagene) or pGEX (glutathione S-transferase; Promega, Madison, Wis.).
  • a suitable bacterial promoter is any nucleic acid sequence capable of binding bacterial RNA polymerase and initiating the downstream (3') transcription of the coding sequence of the Pep 133 gene into mRNA.
  • a bacterial promoter has a transcription initiation region which is usually placed proximal to the 5' end of the coding sequence. This transcription initiation region typically includes an RNA polymerase binding site and a transcription initiation site Sequences encoding metabolic pathway enzymes provide particularly useful promoter sequences. Examples include promoter sequences derived from sugar metabolizing enzymes, such as galactose, lactose and maltose, and sequences derived from biosynthetic enzymes such as tryptophan.
  • Promoters from bacteriophage may also be used and are known in the art.
  • synthetic promoters and hybrid promoters are also useful; for example, the tat promoter is a hybrid of the trp and lac promoter sequences.
  • a bacterial promoter can include naturally occurring promoters of non- bacterial origin that have the ability to bind bacterial RNA polymerase and initiate transcription An efficient ribosome binding site is also desirable.
  • the expression vector may also include a signal . peptide sequence that provides for secretion of the Pep 133-related peptide in bacteria.
  • the signal , , sequence typically encodes a signal peptide comprised of hydrophobic amino acids, which direct the , secretion of the protein from the cell.
  • the protein is either secreted into the growth media (gram- positive bacteria) or into the periplasmic space, located between the inner and outer membrane of the cell (gram-negative bacteria).
  • the bacterial expression vector may also include a selectable marker gene to allow for the selection of bacterial strains that have been transformed.
  • Suitable selection genes include drug resistance genes such as ampicillin, chloramphenicol, erythromycin, kanamycin, neomycin and tetracycline Selectable markers also include biosynthetic genes, such as those in the histidine, tryptophan and leucine biosynthetic pathways When large quantities of Pep 133-related peptides are needed, e.g., for the induction of antibodies, vectors which direct high level expression of fusion proteins that are readily purified may be desirable. Such vectors include, but are not limited to, multifunctional E.
  • Expression vectors for bacteria include the various components set forth above, and are well known in the art. Examples include vectors for Bacillus subtilis, E. coli, Streptococcus cremoris, and Streptococcus liridans. Bacterial expression vectors are transformed into bacterial host cells using techniques well known in the art, such as calcium chloride mediated transfection and electroporation.
  • Yeast expression systems are well known in the art, and include expression vectors for Saccharomyces cerevisiae, Candida albicans and C. maltosa, Hansenula polymorpha, Kluyrevomyces frag is and K. lactis, Pichia guillerimondn and P pastoris, Schizosaccha-vomyces pombe, and Yawowia hpolytica.
  • suitable promoters for use in yeast hosts include the promoters for 3-phosphoglycerate kinase (Hitzeman et al., J. Biol Chem. 255:2073 (1980)) or other glycolytic enzymes (Hess et al.,J. Adv. Enzyme Reg.
  • yeast promoters which are inducible have the additional advantage of transcription controlled by growth conditions, include the promoter regions for alcohol dehydrogenase 2, isocytochrome C, acid phosphatase, degradative enzymes associated with nitrogen metabolism, metallothionein, glyceraldehyde-3 -phosphate dehydrogenase, and enzymes responsible for maltose and galactqse utilization. Suitable vectors and promoters for use in yeast expression are further described in EP 73,657. Yeast selectable markers include ADE2.
  • Yeast expression vectors can be constructed for intracellular production or secretion of a Pep 133-related peptide from the DNA encoding the Pep 133-related peptides of interest.
  • a selected signal peptide and the appropriate constitutive or inducible promoter may be inserted into suitable restriction sites in the selected plasmid for direct intracellular expression of the Pep 133-related peptide.
  • DNA encoding the Pep 133-related peptide can be cloned into the selected plasmid, together with DNA encoding the promoter, the yeast alpha-factor secretory signal/leader sequence, and linker sequences (as needed), for expression of the Pep 133-related peptide.
  • Yeast cells can then be transformed with the expression plasmids described above, and cultured in an appropriate fermentation media.
  • the protein produced by such transformed yeast can then be concentrated by precipitation with 10% trichloroacetic acid and analyzed following separation by SDS-PAGE and staining of the gels with Coomassie Blue stain.
  • the recombinant Pep 133-related peptides can subsequently be isolated and purified from the fermentation medium by techniques known to those of skill in the art.
  • the Pep 133-related peptides may be expressed in mammalian cells.
  • Mammalian expression systems are known in the art, and include retroviral vector mediated expression systems.
  • Mammalian host cells may be transformed with any of a number of different viral-based expression systems, such as adenovirus, where the coding region can be ligated into an adenovirus transcription/translation complex consisting of the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. Insertion in a nonessential El or E3 region of the viral genome results in a viable virus capable of expression of the polypeptide of interest in infected host cells.
  • a preferred expression vector system is a retroviral vector system such as is generally described in PCT/US97/01019 and PCT/US97/101048.
  • Suitable mammalian expression vectors contain a mammalian promoter which is any DNA sequence capable of binding mammalian RNA polymerase and initiating the downstream (3') transcription of a coding sequence for Pep 133-related peptide into mRNA.
  • a promoter will have a transcription initiating region, which is usually placed proximal to the 5' end of the coding sequence, and a TATA box, using a located 25-30 base pairs upstream of the transcription initiation site. The TATA box is thought to direct RNA polymerase II to begin RNA ' synthesis at the correct site
  • a mammalian promoter will also contain an upstream promoter element : ' - (enhancer element), typically located within 100 to 200 base pairs upstream of the TATA box.
  • An ' upstrearn promoter element determines the rate at which transcription is initiated and can act in either orientation.
  • mammalian promoters are the promoters from mammalian viral genes, since the viral genes are often highly expressed and have a broad host range. Examples include promoters obtained from the genomes of viruses such as polyoma virus, fowlpox virus (UK 2,211, 504 published Jul.
  • adenovirus such as Adenovirus 2
  • bovine papilloma virus such as Adenovirus 2
  • bovine papilloma virus such as avian sarcoma virus
  • cytomegalovirus such as a retrovirus
  • a retrovirus such as hepatitis-B virus and Simian Virus 40 (SV40)
  • heteroiogous mammalian promoters e.g., the actin promoter or an immunoglobulin promoter
  • heat-shock promoters provided such promoters are compatible with the host cell systems.
  • Enhancers are cis-acting elements of DNA, usually about from 10 to 300 bp, that act on a promoter to increase its transcription.
  • Many enhancer sequences are now known from mammalian genes (globin, elastase, albumin, a-fetoprotein, and insulin) Typically, however, one will use an enhancer from a eukaryotic cell virus. Examples include the SV40 enhancer, the cytomegalovirus early promoter enhancer, the polyoma enhancer on the late side of the replication origin, and adenovirus enhancers.
  • the enhancer is preferably located at a site 5 ' from the promoter.
  • the transcription termination and polyadenylation sequences recognized by mammalian cells are regulatory regions located 3 ' to the translation stop codon and thus, together with the promoter elements, flank the coding sequence.
  • the 3' terminus of the mature mRNA is formed by site-specific post-translational cleavage and polyadenylation.
  • transcription terminator and polyadenylation signals include those derived from SV40. Long term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins can be effected in a stable expression system. Expression vectors which contain viral origins of replication or endogenous expression elements and a selectable marker gene may be used for this pu ⁇ ose.
  • selectable markers for use in mammalian cells are readily available commercially and are known to persons skilled in the art
  • selectable markers include, but are not limited to he ⁇ es 5 simplex virus thymi-dine kinase and adenine phosphoribosyltransferase for use in tk- or hprt-cells, respectively.
  • the methods of introducing exogenous nucleic acid into mammalian hosts, as well as other hosts, is well known in the art, and will vary with the host cell used.
  • Techniques include dextran-mediated transfection, calcium phosphate precipitation, polybrene mediated transfection, protoplast fusion, electroporation, viral infection, encapsulation of the polynucleotide(s) in 10 liposomes, and direct microinjection of the DNA into nuclei
  • Pep 133 -related peptides may also be produced in insect cells, Expression vectors for the . » • ⁇ transformation of insect cells, and in particular, baculovirus-based expression vectors, are, well
  • the Pep 133-related peptides-encoding DNA is fused upstream of an epitope tag contained within a baculovirus expression vector.
  • Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) is used as a vector to express foreign genes in Spodoptera fungiperda Sf9 cells or in Trichoplusia larvae.
  • the Pep 133-related peptides-encoding sequence is cloned into a nonessential region of the virus, such as the polyhedrin gene, and placed under control of the
  • 25 peptides-encoding DNA include poly-his tags and immunoglobulin tags (like Fc regions of IgG).
  • a variety of plasmids may be employed, including commercially available plasmids such as pVL1393 (Novagen) Briefly, the Pep 133-related peptides-encoding DNA or the desired portion of the Pepl33- related peptides-encoding DNA is amplified by PCR with primers complementary to the 5' and 3' regions. The 5' primer may inco ⁇ orate flanking restriction sites. The PCR product is then digested
  • Recombinant baculovirus is generated by co-transfecting the above plasmid and BaculoGoldTM virus DNA (Pharmingen) into Spodoptera fungiperda (“Sf9”) cells (ATCC CRL 1711) using lipofectm (commercially available from GIBCO-BRL), or other methods known to those of skill in the art.
  • Virus is produced by day 4-5 of culture in Sf9 cells at 28°C, and used for further amplifications
  • Extracts may be prepared from recombinant virus-infected Sf9 cells as described in Rupert et al , Nature 362: 175-179 (1993).
  • expressed epitope-tagged Pep 133-related peptides can be purified by affinity chromatography, or for example, purification of an IgG tagged (or Fc tagged) Pep 133-related 5 peptide can be performed using chromatography techniques, including Protein A or protein G column chromatography.
  • Gene expression may be evaluated in a sample directly, for example, by standard techniques
  • RNA duplexes 10 known to those of skill in the art, e.g., Northern blotting to determine the transcription of mRNA, dot blotting (DNA or RNA), or in situ hybridization, using an appropriately labeled probe, based on the sequences provided herein.
  • antibodies may be used in assays for detection of polypeptides, nucleic acids, such as specific duplexes, including DNA duplexes, RNA duplexes, and
  • Gene expression may be measured by immunohistochemical staining of cells or tissue sections and assay of cell culture or body fluids, to directly evaluate the expression of a Pep 133-related peptide, polypeptide, or polynucleotide.
  • Antibodies useful for such immunological assays may be either
  • Protein levels may also be detected by mass spectrometry.
  • a further method of protein detection is with protein chips
  • Pep 133-related peptides may be purified or isolated after expression, using any of a variety of methods known to those skilled in the art. The appropriate technique will vary depending upon what other components are present in the sample. Contaminant components that are removed by isolation or purification are materials that would typically interfere with diagnostic or therapeutic uses for the polypeptide, and may include enzymes, hormones, and other solutes.
  • the purification is described in detail below.
  • a Pep 133-related peptide or protein may be recovered from culture medium or from host cell lysates. If membrane-bound, it can be released from the membrane using a suitable detergent solution (e.g. Triton-X 100) or by enzymatic cleavage. Alternatively, cells employed in expression of Pep 133-related peptides can be disrupted by various detergent solution (e.g. Triton-X 100) or by enzymatic cleavage. Alternatively, cells employed in expression of Pep 133-related peptides can be disrupted by various detergent solution (e.g. Triton-X 100) or by enzymatic cleavage. Alternatively, cells employed in expression of Pep 133-related peptides can be disrupted by various detergent solution (e.g. Triton-X 100) or by enzymatic cleavage. Alternatively, cells employed in expression of Pep 133-related peptides can be disrupted by various detergent solution (e.g. Triton-
  • Exemplary purification methods include, but are not limited to, ion- exchange column chromatography; chromatography using silica gel or a cation-exchange resin such as DEAE; gel filtration using, for example, Sephadex G-75; protein A Sepharose columns to remove contaminants such as IgG; chromatography using metal chelating columns to bind epitope-tagged forms of the Pep 133 -related peptide; ethanol precipitation; reverse phase HPLC; chromatofocusing; SDS-PAGE, and ammonium sulfate precipitation.
  • an isolated Pep 133-related peptide will be prepared by at least one purification step.
  • the Pep 133-related peptide may be purified using a standard anti-Pep 133-related antibody column. Ultrafiltration and dialysis techniques, in conjunction with protein concentration, are also useful (see, for example, Scopes, R , PROTEIN PURIFICATION, Springer-Verlag, New York, N.Y., 1982).
  • the degree of purification necessary will vary depending on the use of the Pep 133-related peptides. In some instances no purification will be necessary.
  • the Pep 133-related peptides and nucleic acids of the present invention are useful in a number of applications, as detailed below
  • the host cells of the invention can also be used to produce nonhuman transgenic animals.
  • a host cell of the invention is a fertilized oocyte or an embryonic stem cell into which Pep 133-related peptides-coding sequences have been introduced.
  • Such host cells can then be used to create non-human transgenic animals in which exogenous Pep 133-related peptides sequences have been introduced into their genome or homologous recombinant animals in which endogenous Pep 133-related peptides sequences have been altered.
  • Such animals are useful for studying the function and/or activity of a Pep 133-related peptide or fragment thereof and for identifying and/or evaluating modulators of Pep 133-related activity.
  • transgenic animal is a non-human animal, preferably a mammal, more preferably a rodent such as a rat or mouse, in which one or more of the cells of the animal includes a transgene.
  • rodent such as a rat or mouse
  • transgenic animals include non-human primates, sheep, dogs, cows, goats, chickens, amphibians, etc.
  • a transgene is exogenous DNA which is integrated into the genome of a cell from which a transgenic animal develops and which remains in the genome of the mature animal, thereby directing the expression of an encoded gene product in one or more cell types or tissues of the transgenic animal
  • a "homologous recombinant animal” is a non-human animal, preferably a mammal, more preferably a mouse, in which an endogenous Pep 133 gene has been altered by homologous recombination between the endogenous gene and an exogenous DNA molecule introduced into a cell of the animal, e g , an embryonic cell of the animal, prior to development of the animal.
  • a transgenic animal of the invention can be created by introducing a Pep 133-related peptides-encoding nucleic acid into the male pronuclei of a fertilized oocyte, e.g., by microinjection or retroviral infection, and allowing the oocyte to develop in a pseudopregnant female foster animal.
  • the Pep 133-related peptides cDNA sequence or a fragment thereof can be introduced as a transgene into the genome of a non-human animal.
  • a nonhuman homologue of a human Pep 133 gene such as a mouse or rat Pep 133 gene, can be used as a transgene.
  • Intronic sequences and polyadenylation signals can also be included in the transgene to increase the efficiency of expression of the transgene
  • a tissue-specific regulatory sequence(s) can be operably linked to a Pep 133-related peptides transgene to direct expression of a Pep 133-related peptide to particular cells.
  • transgenic founder animal can be identified based upon the presence of a Pep 133-related peptides transgene in its genome and or expression of Pep 133-related peptides mRNA in tissues or cells of the animals. A transgenic founder animal can then be used to breed additional animals carrying the transgene. Moreover, transgenic animals carrying a transgene encoding a Pep 133-related peptide can further be bred to other transgenic animals carrying other transgenes.
  • a vector is prepared which contains at least a portion of a Pep 133 gene into which a deletion, addition or substitution has been introduced to thereby alter, e.g., functionally disrupt, the Pep 133 gene.
  • the Pep 133 gene can be a human gene, but more preferably, is a non- human homologue of a human Pep 133 gene (e.g., a cDNA isolated by stringent hybridization with a nucleotide sequence coding for a Pep 133-related peptide).
  • a mouse Pep 133 gene can be used to construct a homologous recombination vector suitable for altering an endogenous gene in the mouse genome.
  • the vector is designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous Pep 133 gene is functionally disrupted (i.e., no longer encodes a functional protein; also referred to as a "knock out" vector).
  • the vector can be designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous Pep 133 gene is mutated or otherwise altered but still encodes functional protein (e.g., the upstream regulatory region can be altered to thereby alter the expression of the endogenous Pep 133-related peptide).
  • the altered portion of the Pep 133-related peptides or gene is flanked at its 5' and 3' ends by additional nucleic acid sequence of the Pep 133 gene to allow for homologous recombination to occur between the exogenous Pep 133 gene carried by the vector and an endogenous Pepl33 gene in an embryonic stem cell.
  • the additional flanking Pep 133-related nucleic acid sequence is of sufficient length for successful homologous recombination with the endogenous gene.
  • several kilobases of flanking DNA are included in the vector (see e.g , Thomas, K. R. and Capecchi, M R.
  • the vector is introduced into an embryonic stem cell line (e.g., by electroporation) and cells in which the introduced Pep 133 gene has homologously recombined with the endogenous Pepl33 gene are selected (Li, E. et al. (1992) Cell 69:915, the) The selected cells are then injected into a blastocyst of an animal to form aggregation chimeras (Bradley, A. in Teratocarcinomas and Embryonic Stem Cells. A Practical Approach, E. J. Robertson, ed. (IRL, Oxford, 1987) pp. 113-152).
  • a chimeric embryo can then be implanted into a suitable pseudopregnant female foster animal and the embryo brought to term
  • Progeny harboring the homologously recombined DNA in their germ cells can be used to breed animals in which all cells of the animal contain the homologously recombined DNA by germline transmission of the transgene.
  • Methods for constructing homologous recombination vectors and homologous recombinant animals are described further in Bradley, A.
  • transgenic non-human animals can be produced which contain selected systems which allow for regulated expression of the transgene-.
  • a system is the cre/loxP recombinase system of bacteriophage PI.
  • cre/loxP recombinase system of bacteriophage PI.
  • a recombinase system is the FLP recombinase system of Saccharomyces cerevisiae (O'Gorman et al (1991) Science 251: 1351-1355).
  • mice containing transgenes encoding both the Cre recombinase and a selected protein are required.
  • Such animals can be provided through the construction of "double" transgenic animals, e.g., by mating two transgenic animals, one containing a transgene encoding a selected protein and the other containing a transgene encoding a recombinase.
  • the invention further provides methods of testing the activity of, or obtaining, functional fragments and variants of Pep 133-related peptides and Pep 133-related nucleotide sequences involving providing a variant or modified Pep 133-related peptides, or Pepl33- related nucleic acid and assessing whether a polypeptide encoded thereby displays a Pep 133-related activity of the invention.
  • a method of assessing the function of a Pep 133- related peptides polypeptide comprising: (a) providing a Pep 133-related peptide, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof, and (b) testing said Pep 133-related peptide, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof for a Pep 133-related activity, preferably a Pep 133-related activity.
  • Any suitable format may be used, including cell free, cell-based and in vivo formats.
  • said assay may comprise expressing a Pep 133-related nucleic acid in a host cell, and observing Pep 133-related activity in said cell.
  • a Pep 133-related peptide, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof is introduced to a cell, and a Pep 133-related 5 activity is observed.
  • Pep 133-related activities include. (1) antigenicity, or the ability to bind an anti-Pepl33- related peptide specific antibody; (2) immunogenicity, or the ability to generate an anti-Pep 133- related peptide specific antibody; (3) mediating cell proliferation or cell cycle; (4) interacting with a Pep 133-related target molecule, preferably a protein; (5) circulating in human plasma; (6) mediating 10 a Type I IFN-induced anti-cell growth response; (7) mediating a Type I IFN -induced anti- inflammatory response; (8) displaying amidyl modification; and (9) undergoing dibasic cleavage.
  • Pep 133-related biological activity can be assayed by any suitable method known in the art. . Antigenicity and immunogenicity may be detected, for example, as described in the sections titled '. . ' . "Anti Pep 133-related peptide antibodies” and “Uses of Pep 133-related peptide antibodies.” .
  • the effect of Pep 133-related peptides on cell growth may be determined using any method known in the art, such as 3H inco ⁇ oration or by comparing the number of cells cultured in the presence of a Pep 133-related peptide compared to a negative control.
  • Assays for detecting antiviral activity include but are not limited to cell fusion assays and the 25 XTT-tetrazolium anti-HIV assay (Lin, et al., Antimicrob Agents Chemother. (1996) 40: 133-8; Gustafson et al., J. Med. Chem. 35, 1978-1986, 1992; Weislow, Journal of the National Cancer Institute, 81(8), 577-586 (1989); and Gulakowski, J Virological Methods, 33, 87-100, (1991)).
  • in vitro assays that detect Pep 133-related peptide binding to viral envelope target proteins may be designed as exemplified in Gulakowski et al.(1991), supra.
  • Detecting Pep 133-related peptide activity may also comprise detecting any suitable therapeutic endpoint discussed herein in the section titled 35 "Methods of Treatment”.
  • Anti-Pepl 33-related antibodies detect binding, 30 recognition, or integration of viral particles to host cells and are useful to determine the level of Pep 133-related peptide activity, when compared to a negative control. Any such method may be designed or optimized according to methods common to the art. The results may be confirmed by, for example, ultrafiltration experiments and dot-blot assays. Detecting Pep 133-related peptide activity may also comprise detecting any suitable therapeutic endpoint discussed herein in the section titled 35 "Methods of Treatment”. Anti-Pepl 33-related antibodies
  • the present invention provides antibodies and binding compositions specific for Pepl33- related peptides.
  • Such antibodies and binding compositions include polyclonal antibodies, 5 monoclonal antibodies, Fab and single chain Fv fragments thereof, bispecific antibodies, heteroconjugates, and humanized antibodies
  • Such antibodies and binding compositions may be produced in a variety of ways, including hyb ⁇ doma cultures, recombinant expression in bacteria or mammalian cell cultures, and recombinant expression in transgenic animals. There is abundant guidance in the literature for selecting a particular production methodology, e.g. Chadd and
  • ⁇ Antibody fragments of small size, such as Fab and Fv fragments, having no effector functions and limited pharmokinetic activity may be generated in a bacterial expression system.
  • Single chain Fv fragments are highly selective for in vivo tumors, show good tumor penetration and low immunogenicity, and are cleared rapidly from the blood, e.g. Freyre et al, J. Biotechnol., 76: 157-163 (2000). Thus, such
  • immunoglobulin G the molecule may be one of four subclasses: ⁇ l, ⁇ 2, ⁇ 3, or ⁇ 4. If a full-length antibody with effector function is required, then IgG subclasses ⁇ l or ⁇ 3 are preferred, and IgG subclass ⁇ l is most preferred.
  • IgG immunoglobulin G
  • 25 subclasses exhibit potent effector function, complement activation, and promote antibody-dependent cell-mediated cytotoxicity through interaction with specific Fc receptors, e.g Raju et al, Glycobiology, 10: 477-486 (2000), Lund et al, J. Immunol., 147: 2657-2662 (1991).
  • the anti -Pep 133-related antibodies of the present invention may be polyclonal antibodies.
  • Such polyclonal antibodies can be produced in a mammal, for example, following one or more injections of an immunizing agent, and preferably, an adjuvant.
  • the immunizing agent and/or adjuvant will be injected into the mammal by a series of subcutaneous or intraperitoneal injections
  • the immunizing agent may include Pep 133-related peptides or a fusion protein thereof. It may be useful to conjugate the antigen to a protein known to be immunogenic in the mammal being immunized. Examples of such immunogenic proteins include, but are not limited to, keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH), serum albumin, bovine thyroglobulin, and soybean trypsin inhibitor.
  • KLH keyhole limpet hemocyanin
  • serum albumin serum albumin
  • bovine thyroglobulin bovine thyroglobulin
  • soybean trypsin inhibitor soybean trypsin inhibitor.
  • Adjuvants include, for example, Freund's complete adjuvant and MPL-TDM adjuvant (monophosphoryl Lipid A, synthetic trehalose dicoryno-mycolate).
  • the immunization protocol may be determined by one skilled in the art based on standard protocols
  • the anti-Pepl 33-related antibodies may be monoclonal antibodies.
  • Monoclonal antibodies may be produced by hybridomas, wherein a mouse, hamster, or other appropriate host animal, is immunized with an immunizing agent to elicit lymphocytes that produce or are capable of producing antibodies that will specifically bind to the immunizing agent, e.g. Kohler and Milstein, Nature 256:495 (1975).
  • the lymphocytes may be immunized in vitro.
  • the immunizing agent will typically include the Pep 133-related peptides or a fusion protein thereof.
  • lymph node cells are used if non-human mammalian.sources are desired, or peripheral blood lymphocytes ("PBLs") are used if cells of human origin
  • PBLs peripheral blood lymphocytes
  • the lymphocytes are fused with an immortalized cell line using a suitable fusing agent, such as polyethylene glycol, to produce a hybridoma cell, e.g. Goding, MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES: PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE, Academic Press, pp. 59-103 (1986); Liddell and Cryer, A Practical Guide to Monoclonal Antibodies (John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1991); Malik and Lillenoj, Editors, Antibody Techniques
  • immortalized cell lines are transformed mammalian cells, for example, myeloma cells of rat, mouse, bovine or human origin.
  • the hybridoma cells are cultured in a suitable culture medium that preferably contains one or more substances that inhibit the growth or survival of unfused, immortalized cells.
  • the culture medium for the hybridomas typically will include hypoxanthine, aminopterin, and thymidine (HAT), substances which prevent the growth of HGPRT-deficient cells
  • HAT hypoxanthine guanine phosphoribosyl transferase
  • Preferred immortalized cell lines are those that fuse efficiently, support stable high level production of antibody, and are sensitive to a medium such as HAT medium. More preferred immortalized cell lines are murine or human myeloma lines, which can be obtained, for example, from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC), Rockville, MD.
  • the binding specificity of monoclonal antibodies present in the hybridoma supernatant is determined by immunoprecipitation or by an in vitro binding assay, such as radio- immunoassay (RIA) or enzyme- linked immunoabsorbent assay (ELISA). Appropriate techniques and assays are known in the art. 5
  • the binding affinity of the monoclonal antibody can, for example, be determined by the Scatchard analysis of Munson and Pollard, Anal Biochem. 107:220 (1980). After the desired antibody- producing hybridoma cells are identified, the cells may be cloned by limiting dilution procedures and grown by standard methods [Goding, 1986]. Suitable culture media for this pu ⁇ ose include, for example, Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's Medium and RPMI-1640 medium Alternatively, the
  • 10 hybridoma cells may be grown in vivo as ascites in a mammal.
  • the monoclonal antibodies secreted by selected clones may be isolated or purified from the culture medium or ascites fluid by immunoglobulin purification procedures routinely used by those of skill in the art such as, for ⁇ • ⁇ example, protein A-Sepharose, hydroxyl-apatite chromatography, gel electrophoresis, dialysis, or affinity chromatography.
  • the monoclonal antibodies may also be made by recombinant DNA methods, such as those ' described in U.S Pat. No. 4,816,567.
  • DNA encoding the monoclonal antibodies of the invention can be isolated from the Pep 133-related peptides-specific hybridoma cells and sequenced, e.g., by using oligonucleotide probes that are capable of binding specifically to genes encoding the heavy and light chains of murine antibodies. Once isolated, the DNA may be inserted into an expression vector,
  • the DNA also may be modified, for example, by substituting the coding sequence for the human heavy and light chain constant domains for homologous murine sequences (Morrison et al., Proc. Nat Acad. Sci. 81.6851-6855 (1984);
  • non-immunoglobulin polypeptide can be substituted for the constant domains of an antibody of the invention, or can be substituted for the variable domains of one antigen-combining site of an antibody of the invention to create a chimeric bivalent antibody.
  • the antibodies may also be monovalent antibodies.
  • Methods for preparing monovalent antibodies are well known in the art. For example, in vitro methods are suitable for preparing monovalent antibodies. Digestion of antibodies to produce fragments thereof, particularly, Fab fragments, can be accomplished using routine techniques known in the art.
  • such techniques can be used to produce interspecific monoclonal antibodies, wherein the binding region of one species is combined with non-binding region of the antibody of another species to reduce immunogenicity, e g. Liu et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci, Vol. 84, pgs. 3439-3443 (1987), and patents 6,054,297 and 5,530, 101.
  • recombinantly produced Fab and Fv fragments are expressed in bacterial ⁇ host systems.
  • full-length antibodies are produced by mammalian cell culture techniques ' ⁇ More preferably, full-length antibodies are expressed in Chinese Hampster Ovary (CHO) cells or ' - NSO cells ' ⁇ . . - . ' ⁇ - ; -. .. • ⁇ ' ⁇ . • • . -..- - ⁇
  • Both polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies can be screened by ELISA.
  • the test is based on the tendency of macromolecules to adsorb nonspecifically to plastic. The irreversibility of this reaction, without loss of immunological activity, allows the formation of antigen-antibody complexes with a simple separation of such complexes from unbound material.
  • peptide conjugated to a carrier different from that used in immunization is adsorbed to the wells of a 96-well microtiter plate. The adsorbed antigen is then allowed to react in the wells with dilutions of anti-peptide serum.
  • the invention includes immunogens derived from Pep 133-related peptides and immunogens comprising conjugates between carriers and peptides of the invention.
  • immunogen refers to a substance capable of causing an immune response.
  • carrier refers to any substance which when chemically conjugated to a peptide of the invention permits a host organism immunized with the resulting conjugate to generate antibodies specific for the conjugated peptide.
  • Carriers include red blood cells, bacteriophages, proteins, or synthetic particles such as agarose beads.
  • carriers are proteins, such as serum albumin, gamma-globulin, keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH), thyroglobulin, ovalbumin, or fibrinogen 5
  • proteins such as serum albumin, gamma-globulin, keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH), thyroglobulin, ovalbumin, or fibrinogen 5
  • V ⁇ ⁇ coupling e.g. as disclosed by Kagan and Glick, in Jaffe and Behrman, eds. Methods of Hormone - • ⁇ > Radioimmunoassay, pgs. 328-329 (Academic Press, N Y.;-.1979), and Walter et al. Proc. Natl. 5 Acad. Sci, Vol. 77, pgs. 5197-5200 (1980); (2) water-soluble carbodiimides for carboxyl to amino coupling, e.g. as disclosed by Hoare et al, J. Biol. Chem, Vol. 242, pgs.
  • a general rule for selecting an appropriate method for coupling a given peptide to a protein carrier can be stated as follows: the group involved in attachment should occur only once in the sequence, preferably at the appropriate end of the segment. For example, BDB should not be used if a tyrosine residue occurs in the main part of a sequence 5 chosen for its potentially antigenic character. Similarly, centrally located lysines rule out the glutaraldehyde method, and the occurrences of aspartic and glutamic acids frequently exclude the carbodiimide approach. On the other hand, suitable residues can be positioned at either end of chosen sequence segment as attachment sites, whether or not they occur in the "native" protein sequence.
  • tyrosine in the peptide also allows one to set up a sensitive radioimmune assay, if desirable. Therefore, tyrosine can be introduced as a terminal residue if it is not part of the peptide sequence defined by the native polypeptide.
  • Peptides can be linked to KLH through cysteines by MBS as disclosed by Liu et al, Biochemistry, Vol. 18, pgs. 690-697 (1979).
  • the peptides are dissolved in phosphate-buffered saline (pH 7.5), 0.1 M sodium borate buffer (pH 9.0) or 1.0 M sodium acetate buffer (pH 4.0).
  • the pH for the dissolution of the peptide is chosen to optimize peptide solubility.
  • the content of free cysteine for soluble peptides is determined by Ellman's method, Ellman, Arch Biochem Biophys, Vol.
  • the anti-Pep 133-related antibodies of the invention may further comprise humanized antibodies or human antibodies.
  • humanized antibody refers to humanized forms of non-human (e.g, murine) antibodies that are chimeric antibodies, immunoglobulin chains or fragments thereof (such as Fv, Fab, Fab', F(ab'), or other antigen-binding partial sequences of antibodies) which contain some portion of the sequence derived from non-human antibody.
  • Humanized antibodies include human immunoglobulins in which residues from a complementary determining region (CDR) of the human immunoglobulin are replaced by residues from a CDR of a non-human species such as mouse, rat or rabbit having the desired binding specificity, affinity and capacity.
  • CDR complementary determining region
  • the humanized antibody will comprise substantially all of at least one, and generally two, variable domains, in which all or substantially all of the CDR regions correspond to those of a non- human immunoglobulin and all or substantially all of the FR regions are those of a human immunoglobulin consensus sequence.
  • the humanized antibody optimally also will comprise at least a portion of an immunoglobulin constant region (Fc), typically that of a human immunoglobulin (Jones et al. Nature 321 :522-525 (1986) and Presta, Curr. Op. Struct. Biol. 2:593-596 (1992)).
  • Fc immunoglobulin constant region
  • a humanized antibody has one or more amino acids introduced into it from a source which is non-human in order to more closely resemble a human antibody, while still retaining the original binding activity of the antibody.
  • Methods for humanization of antibodies are further detailed in Jones et al , Nature 321 :522-525 (1986); Riechmann et al. Nature 332:323-327 (1988); and Verhoeyen et al. Science 239: 1534- 1536 (1988).
  • Such "humanized" antibodies are chimeric antibodies in that substantially less than an intact human variable domain has been substituted by the corresponding sequence from a non-human species.
  • Heteroconjugate antibodies which comprise two covalently joined antibodies, are also within ⁇ the scope of the present invention.
  • Heteroconjugate antibodies may be prepared in vitro using known methods in synthetic protein chemistry, including those involving crosslinking agents.
  • immunotoxins may be prepared using a disulfide exchange reaction or by. forming a thioefher bond.
  • Bispecific antibodies have binding specificities for at least two different antigens. Such antibodies are monoclonal, and preferably human or humanized. One of the binding specificities of a bispecific antibody of the present invention is for a Pep 133-related peptide, and the other one is preferably for a cell-surface protein or receptor or receptor subunit.
  • Methods for making bispecific antibodies are known in the art, and in general, the recombinant production of bispecific antibodies is based on the co-expression of two immunoglobulin heavy-chain/light-chain pairs in hybridoma cells, where the two heavy chains have different specificities, e.g. Milstein and Cuello, Nature 305:537- 539 (1983). Given that the random assortment of immunoglobulin heavy and light chains results in production of potentially ten different antibody molecules by the hybridomas, purification of the correct molecule usually requires some sort of affinity purification, e.g. affinity chromatography.
  • Antibodies specific for Pep 133-related peptides may be used as functional antagonists.
  • the antagonists of the invention comprise fragments or binding compositions specific for Pep 133-related peptides.
  • antagonists of the invention are derived from monoclonal antibodies specific for Pep 133-related peptides. Monoclonal antibodies capable of blocking, or neutralizing, Pep 133 -related peptides are selected by their ability to inhibit Pep 133-related peptides- induced effects.
  • Fab fragments 5 Tijssen, Practice and Theory of Enzyme Immunoassays (Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1985); and Fv fragments: Hochman et al Biochemistry, Vol. 12, pgs. 1 130-1 135 (1973), Sharon et al. Biochemistry, Vol. 15, pgs. 1591-1594 (1976) and Ehrlich et al, U.S. Patent 4,355,023; and antibody half molecules: Auditore- Hargreaves, U.S. Patent 4,470,925.
  • monoclonal antibodies Preferably, monoclonal antibodies, Fv fragments, Fab fragments, or other binding
  • compositions derived from monoclonal antibodies of the invention have a high affinity to Pepl33- related peptides.
  • Preferred antibodies are capable of preferentially recognizing post-translationally modified Pep 133-related peptides (e.g, amidylated).
  • the affinity of monoclonal antibodies and related molecules to Pep 133-related peptides may be measured by conventional techniques including x- ' ' plasmon resonance, ELISA, equilibrium dialysis; and the like. Affinity measurement by plasmon
  • 15 ⁇ resonance techniques may be carried out, for example, using a BIAcore 2000 instrument (Biacore AB. Uppsala, Sweden) in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended protocol. Preferably, is measured by ELISA, for example, as described in U.S. patent 6,235,883, or like reference.
  • the dissociation constant between Pep 133-related peptides and monoclonal antibodies of the invention is less than 10 "5 molar. More preferably, such dissociation constant is less than 10 "8
  • such dissociation constant is less than 10 "9 molar; and most preferably, such dissociation constant is in the range of 10 "9 to 10 "u molar.
  • the antibodies of the present invention are useful for detecting Pep 133-related peptides. Such detection methods are advantageously applied to diagnosis and prognosis of, e.g, aberrant cell growth conditions.
  • the antibodies of the invention may be used in most assays
  • the assays may be homogeneous or heterogeneous.
  • the sample can be a biological sample or fluid such as serum, urine, whole blood, lymphatic fluid, plasma, saliva, cells, tissue, and material secreted by cells or tissues cultured in vitro.
  • the sample can be pretreated if necessary to remove unwanted materials.
  • the immunological reaction usually involves the specific antibody, labeled analyte, and the sample
  • the analyte can be directly labeled with the label or indirectly labeled with a means for inco ⁇ orating the label such as conjugation of the analyte to biotin and having labeled avidin or anti-biotin.
  • the signal from the label is modified, directly or indirectly, upon the binding of the antibody of the labeled analyte. Both the immunological reaction and detection of the extent thereof are carried out in a homogeneous solution. In a heterogeneous assay approach, the
  • 35 reagents are usually the sample, the specific antibody, and means for producing a detectable signal.
  • the specimen is generally placed on a support, such as a plate or a slide, and contacted with the antibody in a liquid phase.
  • the support is then separated from the liquid phase and either the support phase or the liquid phase is examined for a detectable signal employing means for producing such signal or signal producing system.
  • the signal is related to the presence of the analyte in the sample.
  • Means for producing a detectable signal includes the use of radioactive labels, fluorescers, enzymes, and so forth.
  • Exemplary of heterogeneous immunoassays are the radioimmunoassay, immunofluorescence methods, enzyme-linked immunoassays, and the like.
  • One embodiment of an assay employing an antibody of the present invention involves the use of a surface to which the monoclonal antibody of the invention is attached.
  • the surface 10 of the surface may take different forms, have different compositions and may be a mixture of compositions or laminates.
  • the surface may assume a variety of shapes and -forms and may have varied dimensions, depending on the manner of use and measurement.
  • Illustrative surfaces may be pads, beads, discs, or strips, which may be flat, concave or convex. Thickness is not critical, • '. ⁇ generally being from about 0.1 to 2 mm thick and of any convenient diameter or other dimensions.
  • the surface typically will be supported on a rod, .tube, capillary, fiber, strip, disc, plate, cuvette and the like.
  • the surface will typically be porous and polyfunctional or capable of being polyfunctionalized so as to permit covalent binding of the monoclonal antibody of the invention as well as to permit bonding of other compounds which form a part of a means for producing a detectable signal.
  • Illustrative polymers include polyethylene, polypropylene, poly(4-methylbutene), polystyrene, polymethracrylate, poly(ethylene terephthalate), rayon, nylon, poly(vinyl butyrate), silicones, polyformaldehyde, cellulose, cellulose acetate, nitrocellulose, latex, etc.
  • Other useful materials include paper, glasses, ceramics, metals, metaloids, semiconductor materials, cermets, silicates, substrates that form gels,
  • the sample is mixed with aqueous medium and the medium is contacted with the surface having a monoclonal antibody of the invention bound thereto.
  • a signal producing system and any ancillary materials may also be included in the aqueous medium, either concurrently or added subsequently so as to provide a detectable signal associated with the surface.
  • the means for producing the detectable signal can involve the
  • the signal detected is related to the presence of Pep 133-related peptides in the sample. It is within the scope of the present invention to include a calibration as the measurement surface on the same support.
  • a particular embodiment of an assay in accordance with the present invention involves the use of a support such as a slide or a well of a petri dish.
  • the technique involves the sample to be analyzed on the support with an appropriate fixing material such as acetone and incubating the sample on the slide with a monoclonal antibody of the invention. After washing with an appropriate buffer such as, for example, phosphate buffered saline, the support is contacted with a labeled specific binding partner for the analyte in the sample.
  • an appropriate buffer such as, for example, phosphate buffered s
  • the slide is washed a second time with an aqueous buffer and the determination is made of the binding of the labeled monoclonal antibody to the analyte.
  • the label is fluorescent
  • the slide may be covered with a fluorescent antibody mounting fluid on a cover slip and then K > . examined with a fluorescent microscope to determine the extent of binding.
  • the . label can be an enzyme conjugated to the monoclonal antibody of the invention and the extent of
  • binding can be determined by examining the slide for the presence of enzyme activity, which may be indicated by the formation of a precipitate, a color, or the like.
  • a particular example of an assay utilizing the present antibodies is a double determinant ELISA assay.
  • a support such as a glass or vinyl plate is coated with antibody specific for Pep 133-related peptides by conventional techniques. The support is contacted with the sample suspected of containing Pep 133-related peptides,
  • the support is separated from the medium, washed to remove unbound Pep 133-related peptides with, for example, water or an aqueous buffered medium, and contacted with an antibody specific for Pep 133-related peptides, again usually in an aqueous medium.
  • the antibody is labeled with an enzyme directly or indirectly such as, e.g , horseradish peroxidase or alkaline phosphatase.
  • the enzyme activity of the support or the aqueous medium is determined. This enzyme activity is related to the amount of Pep 133-related peptides in the sample
  • kits e.g, diagnostic assay kits, for carrying out the methods disclosed above
  • the kit comprises in packaged combination (a) a monoclonal
  • the reagents may also include ancillary agents such as buffering agents and protein stabilizing agents, e.g, polysaccharides and the like.
  • the kit may further include, where necessary, other members of the signal producing system of which system the label is a member, agents for reducing background
  • the diagnostic kit comprises a conjugate of monoclonal antibody of the invention and a label capable of producing a detectable signal Ancillary agents as mentioned above may also be present.
  • An anti-Pep 133-related antibody (e.g , monoclonal antibody) can be used to isolate Pepl33- related peptide by standard techniques, such as affinity chromatography or immunoprecipitation.
  • an anti-Pep 133-related antibody can facilitate the purification of endogenous or recombinantly expressed Pep 133-related peptides from cells.
  • an anti-Pep 133-related antibody can be used to detect Pep 133-related peptide (e.g, in a cellular lysate or cell supernatant) in order to evaluate the abundance and pattern of expression of the Pep 133-related peptide.
  • Anti- Pep 133-related antibodies can be used diagnostically to monitor protein levels in tissue as part of a clinical testing procedure, e.g, to, for example, determine the efficacy of a given treatment regimen Detection is facilitated by linking the antibody to any label group.
  • Protein Arrays Detection, purification, and screening of the polypeptides of the invention may be accomplished using retentate chromatography (preferably, protein arrays or chips), as described by U.S. Patent 6225027 and U.S. Patent Application 20010014461. Briefly, retentate chromatography describes methods in which polypeptides (and/ or other sample components) are retained on an adsorbent (e.g, array or chip) and subsequently detected.
  • adsorbent e.g, array or chip
  • Such methods involve (1) selectively adsorbing polypeptides from a sample to a substrate under a plurality of different adsorbent/eluant combinations ("selectivity conditions") and (2) detecting the retention of adsorbed polypeptides by deso ⁇ tion spectrometry (e.g, by mass spectrometry).
  • selectivity conditions a plurality of different adsorbent/eluant combinations
  • deso ⁇ tion spectrometry e.g, by mass spectrometry
  • the coupling of adso ⁇ tion chromatography with detection by deso ⁇ tion spectrometry provides extraordinary sensitivity, the ability to rapidly analyze retained components with a variety of different selectivity conditions, and parallel processing of components adsorbed to different sites (i.e, "affinity sites” or “spots") on the array under different elution conditions.
  • this invention provides a molecular discovery and diagnostic device that is characterized by the inclusion of both parallel and multiplex polypeptide processing capabilities
  • Polypeptides of the invention and Pep 133-related peptide-binding substances are preferably attached to a label group, and thus directly detected, enabling simultaneous transmission of two or more signals from the same "circuit" (i.e, addressable "chip” location) during a single unit operation. Detection of Pep 133-related peptides by mass spectrometry
  • any instrument, method, process, etc. can be utilized to determine the identity and abundance of proteins in a sample.
  • a preferred method of 5 obtaining identity is by mass spectrometry, where protein molecules in a sample are ionized and then the resultant mass and charge of the protein ions are detected and determined.
  • the protein be converted to a gas-ion phase.
  • Various methods of protein ionization are useful, including, e.g, fast ion bombardment (FAB), plasma deso ⁇ tion, laser deso ⁇ tion, thermal deso ⁇ tion, preferably,
  • ESI electrospray ionization
  • MALDI matrix-assisted laser deso ⁇ tion/ionization
  • Many different mass analyzers are available for peptide and protein analysis, including, but not limited to, Time-of-Flight (TOF), ion trap (ITMS), Fourier transform ion cyclotron (FTMS), quadrupole ion trap, and sector (electric and/or magnetic) spectrometers. See, e.g.,' U.S. Pat. No 5,572,025 for an - • • ion-trap MS Mass analyzers can be used alone, or in combination with other mass analyzers in
  • a first mass analyzer can be use to separate the protein ions (precursor ion) from each other and determine the molecular weights of the various protein constituents in the sample.
  • a second mass analyzer can be used to analyze each separated constituents, e.g, by fragmenting the precursor ions into product ions by using, e.g. an inert gas Any desired combination of mass analyzers can be used, including, e.g, triple quadrupoles, tandem
  • time-of-flights 20 time-of-flights, ion traps, and/or combinations thereof.
  • detectors can be used to detect the protein ions.
  • destructive detectors can be utilized, such as ion electron multipliers or cryogenic detectors (e.g, U.S. Pat. No. 5,640,010).
  • non-destructive detectors can be used, such as ion traps, which are used as ion current pick-up devices in quadrupole ion trap mass analyzers or FTMS.
  • sample preparation methods can be utilized including, dried droplet (Karasand Hillenkamp, Anal. Chem, 60:2299-2301, 1988), vacuum-drying (Winberger et al. In Proceedings of the 41st ASMS Conference on Mass Spectrometry and Allied Topics, San Francisco, May 31-June 4, 1993, pp 775a-b), crush crystals (Xiang et al. Rapid Comm. Mass Spectrom, 8: 199-204, 1994), slow crystal growing (Xiang et al, Org. Mass Spectrom, 28: 1424-
  • samples are prepared as solid-state co-crystals or thin films by mixing 5 them with an energy absorbing compound or colloid (the matrix) in the liquid phase, and ultimately drying the solution to the solid state upon the surface of an inert probe.
  • an energy absorbing compound or colloid the matrix
  • an energy absorbing molecule is an integral component of the sample presenting surface.
  • the probe contents are allowed to dry to the solid state prior to introduction into the laser deso ⁇ tion/ionization time-of-flight mass spectrometer (LDIMS).
  • LIMS laser deso ⁇ tion/ionization time-of-flight mass spectrometer
  • Ion detection in TOF mass spectrometry is typically achieved with the use of electro- emissive detectors such as electron multipliers (EMP) or microchannel plates (MCP). Both of these devices function by converting primary incident charged particles into a cascade of secondary, tertiary,, quaternary, etc. electrons. The probability of secondary electrons being generated by the : . • ,. ; impact of a single incident charged particle can be taken to be the ion-to-electron conversion . ,
  • EMP electron multipliers
  • MCP microchannel plates
  • MCPs are the preferred electro-emissive detector for enhancing mass/charge resolving power.
  • EMPs function well for detecting ion populations of
  • LC-TMS liquid-chromatography tandem mass spectrometer
  • the methods described herein of separating and fractionating proteins provide individual proteins or fractions containing small numbers of distinct proteins. These proteins can be identified by mass spectral determination of the molecular masses of the protein and peptides resulting from the fragmentation thereof. Making use of available information in protein sequence databases, a comparison can be made between proteolytic peptide mass patterns generated in silico, and
  • a "hit-list” can be compiled, ranking candidate proteins in the database, based on (among other criteria) the number of matches between the theoretical and experimental proteolytic fragments.
  • Methods of peptide mapping and sequencing using MS are described in WO 95/252819, U.S. Pat. No. 5,538,897, U.S. Pat. No. 5,869,240, U.S. Pat. No. 5,572,259, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,696,376. See, also, Yates, J. Mass Spec, 33: 1 (1998).
  • Data collected from a mass spectrometer typically comprises the intensity and mass to charge ratio for each detected event.
  • Spectral data can be recorded in any suitable form, including, e g , in graphical, numerical, or electronic formats, either in digital or analog form.
  • Spectra are preferably recorded in a storage medium, including, e.g, magnetic, such as floppy disk, tape, or hard disk, optical, such as CD-ROM or laser-disc; or, ROM-CHIPS.
  • the mass spectrum of a given sample typically provides information on protein intensity, mass to charge ratio, and molecular weight. In preferred embodiments of the invention, the molecular weights of proteins in the sample are used as a matching criterion to query a database.
  • the molecular weights are calculated conventionally, e.g., by subtracting the mass of the ionizing proton for singly- charged protonated molecular ions, by multiplying the measured mass/charge ratio by the number of 10 charges for multiply-charged ions and subtracting the number of ionizing protons.
  • databases are useful in accordance with the present invention.
  • Useful databases include, databases containing genomic sequences, expressed gene sequences, and/or expressed protein sequences.
  • Preferred databases contain nucleotide sequence-derived molecular masses of " • - - proteins present in a known organism, organ, tissue, or cell-type.
  • ORF open reading frames
  • nucleotide sequences into protein sequence and molecular weight information.
  • Several publicly accessible databases are available, including, the SwissPROT/TrEMBL database (http://www.expasy.ch).
  • a mass spectrometer is equipped with commercial software that identifies peaks above a certain threshold level, calculates mass, charge, and intensity of detected ions. Correlating 20 molecular weight with a given output peak can be accomplished directly from the spectral data, i.e , where the charge on an ion is one and the molecular weight is therefore equal to the numerator value - minus the mass of the ionizing proton.
  • protein ions can be complexed with various counter-ions and adducts, such as N, C, and K ⁇ In such a case, it would be expected that a given protein ion would exhibit multiple peaks, such as a triplet, representing different ionic states (or 25 species) of the same protein.
  • post-translation 30 processing may have to be considered.
  • processing events which modify protein structure, including, proteolytic processing, removal of N-terminal methionine, acetylation, methylation, glycosylation, phosphorylation, etc.
  • a database can be queried for a range of proteins matching the molecular mass of the unknown
  • the range window can be determined by the accuracy of the instrument, the method by 35 which the sample was prepared, etc. Based on the number of hits (where a hit is match) in the spectrum, the unknown protein or peptide is identified or classified.
  • Methods of identifying one or more Pep 133-related peptide by mass spectrometry are useful for detection of one or more Pep 133-related peptide present in human plasma. Exemplary techniques are described in U.S. Patent Applications 02/0060290, 02/0137106, 02/0138208, 02/0142343, 5 02/0155509.
  • nucleic acid molecules, proteins, protein homologues, and antibodies described herein can be used in one or more of the following methods: diagnostic assays, prognostic assays, 10 monitoring clinical trials, and pharmacogenetics as further described herein.
  • the invention provides diagnostic and prognostic assays for detecting Pep 133-related peptide nucleic acids and proteins, as further described. Also provided are diagnostic and prognostic assays for detecting interactions between Pep 133-related peptides and target molecules, particularly , *• natural agonists and antagonists. - , , • . , • - , - • ;• * - , • .. , , ⁇
  • the present invention provides methods for identifying polypeptides that are differentially - expressed between two or more samples.
  • "Differential expression” refers to differences in the quantity or quality of a polypeptide between samples. Such differences could result at any stage of protein expression from transcription through post-translational modification.
  • two samples are bound to affinity spots on different sets of adsorbents (e g , 20 chips) and recognition maps are compared to identify polypeptides that are differentially retained by the two sets of adsorbents Differential retention includes quantitative retention as well as qualitative differences in the polypeptide.
  • differences in post-translational modification of a protein can result in differences in recognition maps detectable as differences in binding characteristics (e.g, glycosylated proteins bind differently to lectin adsorbents) or differences in 25 mass (e.g, post-translational cleavage products).
  • an adsorbent can have an array of affinity spots selected for a combination of markers diagnostic for a disease or syndrome.
  • Differences in polypeptide levels between samples e.g , differentially expressed Pep 133- related peptides in plasma samples
  • Unknown proteins can 30 be identified by detecting physicochemical characteristics (e.g, molecular mass), and this information can be used to search databases for proteins having similar profiles.
  • Preferred methods of detecting a Pep 133-related peptide utilize mass spectrometry techniques Such methods provide information about the size and character of the particular Pep 133-related peptide isoform that is present in a sample, e.g, a biological sample submitted for 35 diagnosis or prognosis. Mass spectrometry techniques are detailed in the section titled "Detection of Pep 133-related peptides by mass spectrometry".
  • the invention provides a method of detecting a Pep 133-related peptide in a biological sample comprising the steps of fractionating a biological sample (e g, serum, lymph, cerebrospinal fluid, cell lysate of a particular tissue) by at least one chromatographic step; subjecting a fraction to mass spectrometry; comparing the characteristics of 5 peptide species observed in mass spectrometry with known characteristics of Pep 133-related peptides.
  • a biological sample e g, serum, lymph, cerebrospinal fluid, cell lysate of a particular tissue
  • the isolated nucleic acid molecules of the invention can be used, for example, to detect Pep 133-related mRNA (e.g, in a biological sample) or a genetic alteration in a Pepl33-encoding gene, and to modulate a Pep 133-related peptide activity, as described further below.
  • Pep 133-related peptides can be used to treat disorders characterized by insufficient production of a Pep l33- related peptide or by excessive production of a Pep 133-related peptide target molecule.
  • the Pep 133-related peptides can be used to screen for naturally occurring target molecules, to screen . for drugs or compounds which modulate, preferably activate Pep 133-related peptide activity, as well :, - as to treat disorders characterized by insufficient production of Pep 133-related peptide or production
  • Pep 133-related peptide forms which have decreased or aberrant activity compared to wild type.
  • the anti- Pep 133-related peptide antibodies of the invention can be used to detect and isolate Pep 133-related peptide, regulate the bioavailability of Pep 133-related peptide, and modulate Pep 133-related peptide activity.
  • one embodiment of the present invention involves a method of use (e.g, a
  • a molecule of the present invention e.g, a Pep 133-related peptide, nucleic acid, antibody, or modulator
  • the present invention involves a method of use wherein a molecule of the present invention is used, for example, for the diagnosis, prognosis, and/or treatment of subjects,
  • the methods of use involve administering to a subject, preferably a human subject, a molecule of the present invention for the diagnosis, prognosis, and/or therapeutic treatment. In another embodiment, the methods of use involve administering to a human subject a molecule of the present invention.
  • the invention encompasses a method of determining whether a Pep 133-related peptide is expressed within a biological sample comprising: a) contacting said biological sample with: l) a polynucleotide that hybridizes under stringent conditions to a Pep 133-related nucleic acid; or ii) a detectable polypeptide (e.g. antibody) that selectively binds to a Pep 133-related peptide; and b) detecting the presence or absence of hybridization between said polynucleotide and an RNA
  • the polynucleotide is a primer, and wherein said hybridization is detected by detecting the presence of an amplification product comprising said primer sequence, or the detectable polypeptide is an antibody.
  • detection involves the use of a probe/primer in a polymerase chain reaction (PCR) (see, e.g, U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • Also envisioned is a method of determining whether a mammal, preferably human, has an elevated or reduced level of expression of a Pep 133-related peptide comprising: a) providing a .. ⁇ biological sample from said mammal; and b) comparing the amount of a Pep 133-related peptide- or - • , ⁇ of a Pep 133-related RNA species within said biological sample with a level detected in or expected . from a control sample.
  • An increased amount of said Pep 133-related ' peptide or said RNA species - within said biological sample compared to said level detected in or expected from said control sample indicates that said mammal has an elevated level of Pep 133-related peptide expression
  • a decreased amount of said Pep 133-related peptide or said RNA species within said biological sample compared to said level detected in or expected from said control sample indicates that said mammal has a reduced level of expression of a Pep 133-related peptide.
  • the present invention also pertains to the field of predictive medicine in which diagnostic assays, prognostic assays, and monitoring clinical trials are used for prognostic pu ⁇ oses to thereby treat an individual prophylactically. Accordingly, one aspect of the present invention relates to diagnostic assays for determining Pep 133-related peptide and/or nucleic acid expression as well as Pep 133 -related peptide activity, in the context of a biological sample (e.g, blood, serum, cells, tissue) to thereby determine whether an individual is afflicted with a disease or disorder, or is at risk of developing a disorder, associated with aberrant Pep 133 -related peptide expression or activity. The invention also provides for prognostic (or predictive) assays for determining whether an individual is at risk of developing a disorder associated with a Pep 133-related peptide, nucleic acid expression or activity.
  • a biological sample e.g, blood, serum, cells, tissue
  • mutations in a Pep 133-related peptide -encoding gene can be assayed in a biological sample.
  • Such assays can be used for prognostic or predictive pu ⁇ ose to thereby prophylactically treat an individual prior to the onset of a disorder characterized by or associated with Pep 133-related peptide expression or activity.
  • biological sample is intended to include tissues, cells and biological fluids isolated from an individual, as well as tissues, cells and fluids present within an individual. That is, the detection methods of the invention can be used to detect a Pep 133-related peptide mRNA, protein, or genomic DNA in a biological sample in vitro as well as in vivo.
  • Preferred biological samples are biological fluids such as lymph, cerebrospinal fluid, blood, and especially blood serum
  • in vitro techniques for detection of a Pep 133-related peptide mRNA include Northern 5 hybridizations and in situ hybridizations.
  • In vitro techniques for detection of a Pep 133-related peptide include mass spectrometry, enzyme linked immunosorbent assays (ELISAs), Western blots, immunoprecipitations and lmmunofluorescence.
  • In vitro techniques for detection of a Pep 133 -related peptide -encoding genomic DNA include Southern hybridizations.
  • in vivo techniques for detection of a Pep 133-related peptide include introducing into an individual a labeled anti-
  • the subject methods can be characterized by generally comprising detecting, in a tissue sample of the individual (e.g. a human patient), the presence or absence of a genetic lesion characterized by at least one of (i) a mutation of a gene encoding one of the subject -- ⁇ .• - Pep 133-related peptide or (ii) the ' mis-expression of a Pepl33 gene.
  • a tissue sample of the individual e.g. a human patient
  • a genetic lesion characterized by at least one of (i) a mutation of a gene encoding one of the subject -- ⁇ .• - Pep 133-related peptide or (ii) the ' mis-expression of a Pepl33 gene.
  • lesions can be detected by ascertaining the existence of at least one of (i) a deletion of one or more nucleotides from the Pep 133 gene, (ii) an addition of one or more nucleotides to the gene, (iii) a substitution of one or more nucleotides of the gene, (iv) a gross chromosomal rearrangement or amplification of the gene, (v) a gross alteration in the level of a messenger RNA transcript of the gene, (vi) aberrant modification of the gene, such as of the methylation pattern of the genomic DNA,
  • aberrant methylation patterns of a Pep 133-related peptide nucleic acid can be detected by digesting genomic DNA from a patient sample with one or
  • Pep 133 gene 25 more restriction endonucleases that are sensitive to methylation and for which recognition sites exist in the Pep 133 gene (including in the flanking and intronic sequences). See, for example, Buiting et al (1994) Human Mol Genet 3:893-895 Digested DNA is separated by gel electrophoresis, and hybridized with probes derived from, for example, genomic or cDNA sequences. The methylation status of the Pep 133 gene can be determined by comparison of the restriction pattern generated from
  • a diagnostic assay which detects the ability of a Pep 133-related peptide to bind to a cell surface or extracellular protein. For instance, it will be desirable to detect Pep 133-related peptide mutants which, while expressed at appreciable levels in the cell, are defective at binding a Pep 133-related peptide target protein (having either diminished or
  • Such mutants may arise, for example, from mutations, e g , point mutants, which may be impractical to detect by the diagnostic DNA sequencing techniques or by the immunoassays described above.
  • the present invention accordingly further contemplates diagnostic screening assays which generally comprise cloning one or more Pep 133 gene from the sample tissue, and expressing the cloned genes under conditions which permit detection of an 5 interaction between that recombinant gene product and a target protein.
  • diagnostic screening assays which generally comprise cloning one or more Pep 133 gene from the sample tissue, and expressing the cloned genes under conditions which permit detection of an 5 interaction between that recombinant gene product and a target protein.
  • a wide variety of techniques can be used to determine the ability of a Pep 133-related peptide to bind to other components. These techniques can be used to detect mutations in a Pep 133 gene, which give rise to mutant proteins with a higher or lower binding affinity for a Pep 133 target protein relative
  • the subject assay can also be used to detect target protein mutants which have a higher or lower binding affinity for a Pep 133-related peptide relative to a wild type form of that target protein.
  • a target protein can be provided as an immobilized protein (a
  • target such as by use of GST fusion proteins and glutathione treated microtitre plates as described herein.
  • the methods further involve obtaining a control biological sample from a control subject, contacting the control sample with a compound or agent capable of detecting a Pep 133-related peptide, mRNA, or genomic DNA, such that the presence of a Pep 133-related
  • kits for detecting the presence of a Pep 133-related peptide, mRNA or genomic DNA in a biological sample comprises: a labeled compound or agent capable of
  • the compound or agent can be packaged in a suitable container.
  • the kit can further comprise instructions for using the kit to detect Pep 133 -related peptide or nucleic acid
  • the invention provides a method (also referred to herein as a "screening assay") for identifying modulators (e g., small molecules, peptides, antibodies, peptidomimetics, or other drugs) which bind to Pep 133-related peptides, have an inhibitory or activating effect on, for example,
  • modulators e g., small molecules, peptides, antibodies, peptidomimetics, or other drugs
  • Pep 133-related peptide expression or activity or the activity of a Pep 133-related target molecule can be generated using combinatorial chemistry or can be obtained from a natural products library.
  • Assays may be cell based or non-cell based assays
  • Drug screening assays may be binding assays or more preferentially functional assays, as further described.
  • Pep 133-related peptide activity may be used, for example, to reduce cell growth or as antitumoral agents alone or in combination with other appropriate agents or treatments This may be applied to control the growth of rapidly dividing cells, for example, to reduce an immune response or aberrant cell growth in a nonhuman or human mammal
  • agonists are useful antiviral agents, and may be applied to cultured cells or nonhuman mammals in antiviral drug development
  • Agents found to inhibit Pep 133-related peptide activity may be used, for example, to modulate antitumoral or antiinflammatory treatment regimens or to promote survival of beneficial cells (e.g, hair follicle cells).
  • Pep 133-related peptide inhibitors are useful growth promoters for cultured cells to postpone senescence. -
  • Protein array methods are useful for screening and drug discovery. For example, one member of a receptor/ ligand pair is docked to an adsorbent, and its ability to bind, the binding partner is determined in the presence of the test substance. Because of the rapidity with which adso ⁇ tion can be tested, combinatorial libraries of test substances can be easily screened for their ability to modulate the interaction. In preferred screening methods, Pep 133-related peptides are docked to the adsorbent. Binding partners are preferably labeled, thus enabling detection of the interaction. Alternatively, in certain embodiments, a test substance is docked to the adsorbent. The polypeptides of the invention are exposed to the test substance and screened for binding Preferred test substances include substances correlated with a disease or disorder, such as a protein, lipid, or endocrine factor differentially present in disease.
  • a disease or disorder such as a protein, lipid, or endocrine factor differentially present in disease.
  • an assay is a cell-based assay in which a cell which expresses a Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to inhibit, activate, or increase Pep 133-related activity determined. Determining the ability of the test compound to inhibit, activate, or increase Pep 133-related activity can be accomplished by monitoring the bioactivity of the Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof.
  • the cell for example, can be of mammalian origin, insect origin, bacterial origin or a yeast cell.
  • the cell can be a mammalian cell, bacterial cell or yeast cell which has been engineered to lack a natural inhibitor of a Pep 133-related peptides.
  • the invention provides assays for screening candidate compounds, which are target molecules of a Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof. In another embodiment, the invention provides assays for screening candidate compounds, which bind to or modulate the activity of a Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof.
  • the test compounds of the present invention can be obtained using any of the numerous approaches in combinatorial library methods known in the art, including: biological libraries; spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries; synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution; the ' one-bead one-compound' library method; and synthetic library methods using affinity 5 chromatography selection.
  • the biological library approach is used with peptide libraries, while the other four approaches are applicable to peptide, non-peptide oligomer or small molecule libraries of compounds (Lam, K. S. (1997) Anticancer Drug Des. 12: 145).
  • Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof can also be accomplished, for example, by coupling the Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof with a radioisotope or enzymatic label such that binding of the Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof to its cognate target molecule can be determined by detecting the labeled Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof in a complex.
  • the labeled molecule is placed in contact with its cognate molecule and the extent of complex formation
  • the extent of complex formation may be measured by immuno precipitating the complex or by performing gel electrophoresis.
  • a microphysiometer can be any suitable compound (e.g. Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof) to interact with its cognate target molecule without the labeling of any of the interactants.
  • a microphysiometer can be any suitable compound (e.g. Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof) to interact with its cognate target molecule without the labeling of any of the interactants.
  • a microphysiometer can be
  • a microphysiometer such as a cytosensor is an analytical instrument that measures the rate at which a cell acidifies its environment using a light-addressable potentiometric sensor (LAPS). Changes in this acidification rate can be used as an indicator of the interaction between compound and receptor.
  • LAPS light-addressable potentiometric sensor
  • the assay comprises contacting a cell which expresses a Pep 133- related peptide or biologically active portion thereof, with a target molecule to form an assay mixture, contacting the assay mixture with a test compound, and determining the ability of the test compound to inhibit or increase the activity of the Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof, wherein determining the ability of the test compound to inhibit or increase the 5 activity of the Pep 133 -related peptide or biologically active portion thereof, comprises determining the ability of the test compound to inhibit or increase a biological activity of the Pep 133-related peptide expressing cell.
  • the assay comprises contacting a cell which is responsive to a Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof, with a Pep 133-related peptide or 0 biologically-active portion thereof, to form an assay mixture, contacting the assay mixture with a test compound, and determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of the Pepl33- related peptide or biologically active portion thereof, wherein determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of the Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion , , ,.-.
  • an assay is a cell-based assay comprising contacting a cell expressing a Pep 133-related target molecule (i.e. a molecule with which Pep 133-related peptides interact) with a test compound and determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of the Pep 133-related target molecule. Determining the ability of the test compound to 0 modulate the activity of a Pep 133-related target molecule can be accomplished, for example, by assessing the activity of a target molecule.
  • a Pep 133-related target molecule i.e. a molecule with which Pep 133-related peptides interact
  • Determining the ability of the Pep 133-related peptide to interact with a Pep 133-related target molecule can be accomplished by one of the methods described for determining direct binding. In a preferred embodiment, determining the ability of the 5 Pep 133-related peptide to interact with a Pep 133-related target molecule can be accomplished by determining the activity of the target molecule.
  • the activity of the target molecule can be determined by contacting the target molecule with the Pep 133-related peptide or a fragment thereof and measuring induction of a cellular second messenger of the target (i.e intracellular Ca2+, diacylglycerol, IP3, etc.), detecting catalytic/enzymatic activity of the target on appropriate 0 substrate, detecting the induction of a reporter gene (comprising a target-responsive regulatory element operatively linked to a nucleic acid encoding a detectable marker, e.g , luciferase), or detecting a target-regulated cellular response, for example, signal transduction or proteimprotein interactions.
  • a cellular second messenger of the target i.e intracellular Ca2+, diacylglycerol, IP3, etc.
  • detecting catalytic/enzymatic activity of the target on appropriate 0 substrate detecting the induction of a reporter gene (comprising a target-responsive regulatory element operatively linked to a nucleic acid
  • an assay of the present invention is a cell-free assay in which a 5 Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to bind to the Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof is determined. Binding of the test compound to the Pep 133-related peptide can be determined either directly or indirectly as described above.
  • the assay includes contacting the Pep 133 -related peptide or biologically active portion thereof with a known compound 5 which binds Pep 133-related peptides (e.g, a Pep 133-related target molecule) to form an assay mixture, contacting the assay mixture with a test compound, and determining the ability of the test compound to interact with a Pep 133-related peptide, wherein determining the ability of the test compound to interact with a Pep 133-related peptide comprises determining the ability of the test compound to preferentially bind to Pep 133-related peptides or biologically active portion thereof as
  • the assay is a cell-free assay in which a Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of the Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion ' ⁇ dress - ! .' thereof is determined/Determining the ability of the test compound- to modulate the activity of a
  • Pep 133 -related peptide can be accomplished, for example, by determining the ability of the Pepl33- related peptide to bind directly to a Pep 133-related target molecule or by using a technology such as real-time Biomolecular Interaction Analysis (BIA). Sjolander, S. and Urbaniczky, C. (1991) Anal. Chem. 63:2338-2345 and Szabo et al. (1995) Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 5:699-705. As used herein, "BIA” is a technology for studying biospecific interactions in real time, without labeling any of the
  • SPR surface plasmon resonance
  • determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of a Pep 133-related peptide can be accomplished by determining the ability of the Pep 133- related peptide to further modulate the activity of a downstream effector (e.g, a growth factor
  • the activity of the effector molecule on an appropriate target can be determined or the binding of the effector to an appropriate target can be determined as previously described.
  • the cell-free assay involves contacting a Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof with a known compound which binds the Pep 133-related
  • determining the ability of the test compound to interact with the Pepl33-related peptide comprises determining the ability of the Pep 133-related peptide to preferentially bind to or modulate the activity of a Pep 133-related target molecule.
  • the cell-free assays of the present invention are amenable to use of both soluble and/or membrane-bound forms of isolated proteins (e.g Pep 133-related peptides or biologically active portions thereof or molecules to which Pep 133-related peptides targets bind).
  • isolated proteins e.g Pep 133-related peptides or biologically active portions thereof or molecules to which Pep 133-related peptides targets bind.
  • a solubilizing agent such that the membrane-bound form of the isolated protein is maintained in solution.
  • Binding of a test compound to a Pepl33?related peptide, or interaction of a Pep 133 -related peptide with a target molecule in the presence and n absence of a candidate compound can be ⁇ ⁇ accomplished in any vessel suitable for containing the reactants and by any immobilization protocol described herein.
  • the complexes can be dissociated from the matrix, and the level of Pep 133-related peptides binding or activity determined using standard techniques.
  • a Pep 133-related peptide or a Pep 133-related target molecule can be immobilized utilizing conjugation of biotin and streptavidin.
  • Biotinylated Pep 133- related peptide or target molecules can be prepared from biotin-NHS (N-hydroxy-succinimide) using techniques well known in the art (e.g, biotinylation kit, Pierce Chemicals, Rockford, 111.), and immobilized in the wells of streptavidin-coated 96 well plates (Pierce Chemical).
  • antibodies reactive with Pep 133-related peptide or target molecules but which do not interfere with binding of the Pep 133-related peptide to its target molecule can be derivatized to the wells of the plate, and unbound target or Pep 133 -related peptide trapped in the wells by antibody conjugation
  • Methods for detecting such complexes include immunodetection of complexes using antibodies reactive with the Pep 133-related peptide or target molecule, as well as enzyme-linked assays which rely on detecting an enzymatic activity associated with the Pep 133 -related peptide or target molecule.
  • modulators of Pep 133 -related peptides expression are identified in a method wherein a cell is contacted with a candidate compound and the expression of Pep 133-related peptides mRNA or protein in the cell is determined. The level of expression of Pep 133-related peptides mRNA or protein in the presence of the candidate compound is compared to the level of expression of Pep 133-related peptides mRNA or protein in the absence of the candidate compound. The candidate compound can then be identified as a modulator of Pep 133-related peptides expression based on this comparison.
  • the candidate compound when expression of Pep 133-related peptides mRNA or protein is greater (statistically significantly greater) in the presence of the candidate compound than 5 in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as a stimulator of Pep 133-related peptides mRNA or protein expression Alternatively, when expression of Pep 133-related peptides mRNA or protein is less (statistically significantly less) in the presence of the candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as an inhibitor of Pep 133-related peptides mRNA or protein expression.
  • the level of Pep 133-related peptides mRNA or protein expression in the cells can
  • the Pep 133-related peptides can be used as "bait proteins" in a two-hybrid assay or three-hybrid assay (see, e.g, U.S Pat. No. 5,283,317; Zervos et .,al. (1993) Cell 72 223-232; Madura et al. (1993) J. Biol. Chem. 268: 12046-12054; Bartel et al. ⁇ . v:,.
  • Pep 133-related peptides-binding proteins bind to or interact with Pep 133-related peptides " ⁇ ' ' ("Pep 133-related peptides-binding proteins" or "Pep 133-related peptides-bp") and are involved in Pep 133-related activity
  • Pep 133-related peptides-binding proteins are also likely to be involved in the propagation of signals by the Pep 133-related peptides or Pep 133-related peptides targets as, for example, downstream elements of a Pep 133 -related peptides-mediated signaling pathway.
  • Pep 133-related peptides-binding proteins are likely to be Pep 133-related inhibitors.
  • the two-hybrid system is based on the modular nature of most transcription factors, which consist of separable DNA-binding and activation domains. Briefly, the assay utilizes two different DNA constructs. In one construct, the gene that codes for a Pep 133-related peptide or a fragment
  • a DNA sequence, from a library of DNA sequences, that encodes an unidentified protein (“prey” or “sample”) is fused to a gene that codes for the activation domain of the known transcription factor. If the "bait” and the “prey” proteins are able to interact, in vivo, forming a Pep 133-related peptides -dependent complex, the DNA-binding and activation domains of
  • the transcription factor are brought into close proximity This proximity allows transcription of a reporter gene (e.g, LacZ) which is operably linked to a transcriptional regulatory site responsive to the transcription factor Expression of the reporter gene can be detected and cell colonies containing the functional transcription factor can be isolated and used to obtain the cloned gene, which encodes the protein, which interacts with the Pep 133-related peptide.
  • a reporter gene e.g, LacZ
  • the present invention includes a compound or agent obtainable by a method comprising the steps of any one of the aforementioned screening assays (e.g, cell-based assays or cell-free assays) Accordingly, it is within the scope of this invention to further use an agent identified in a 5 described screening assay in an appropriate animal model.
  • an agent identified as described herein e.g, a Pep 133-related peptide modulating agent
  • an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the efficacy, toxicity, or side effects of treatment with such an agent.
  • an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the mechanism of action of such an agent.
  • this invention pertains to uses of novel agents identified by the 10 above-described screening assays for treatments as described herein.
  • the present invention also pertains to uses of novel agents identified by the above-described screening assays for diagnoses, prognoses, and treatments as described herein. Accordingly, it is within the scope of the present invention to use such agents in the design, formulation, synthesis, . ⁇ . .. . . manufacture, and/orproduction of a drug or pharmaceutical composition for use in diagnosis, - ,, 15 relieve,, prognosis, or treatment, as described herein.
  • the present invention includes a method of synthesizing or producing a drug or pharmaceutical composition by reference to the structure and/or properties of a compound obtainable by one of the above-described screening assays..
  • polypeptides of the present invention When polypeptides of the present invention are expressed in soluble form, for example as a secreted product of transformed yeast or mammalian cells, they can be purified according to standard procedures of the art, including steps of ammonium sulfate precipitation, ion exchange chromatography, gel filtration, electrophoresis, affinity chromatography, and/or the like, e.g
  • polypeptides of the invention when expressed in insoluble form, for example as aggregates, they can be purified by standard procedures in the art, including separating the inclusion bodies from disrupted host cells by centrifugation, solubilizing the
  • compositions suitable for administration may be inco ⁇ orated into pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration.
  • Such compositions typically comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is intended to include any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and abso ⁇ tion delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration.
  • the use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active compound, use thereof in the compositions is contemplated.
  • Supplementary active compounds can also be inco ⁇ orated into the compositions
  • a pharmaceutical composition of the invention is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration.
  • routes of administration include parenteral, e g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, oral (e.g, inhalation), transdermal (topical), transmucosal, and rectal administration.
  • Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, or subcutaneous application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene- glycofor other synthetic solvents; - ⁇ • .antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide.
  • the parenteral preparation can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.
  • compositions suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions (where water soluble) or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersion.
  • suitable carriers include physiological saline, bacteriostatic water, Cremophor EL® (BASF, Parsippany, N.J.) or phosphate buffered saline (PBS).
  • the composition must be sterile and should be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists.
  • the carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyetheylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof.
  • the proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants.
  • Prevention of the action microorganisms can be achieved by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, ascorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like.
  • isotonic agents for example, sugars, polyalcohols such as manitol, sorbitol, sodium chloride in the composition.
  • Prolonged abso ⁇ tion of the injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent which delays abso ⁇ tion, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
  • sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by inco ⁇ oratmg the active compound in 5 the required amount of an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization
  • dispersions are prepared by inco ⁇ orating the active compound into a sterile vehicle which contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above.
  • the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum drying 10 and freeze-drying which yields a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
  • Oral compositions generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They can be , ⁇ enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets. For the pu ⁇ ose of oral therapeutic - > • • administration; the active compound can be inco ⁇ orated with excipients and used'in the form of _.15 tablets, troches, or.capsules.
  • the cornpounds are delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from pressured container or dispenser, which contains a suitable propellant, e.g , a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer.
  • Systemic administration can also be by transmucosal or transdermal means.
  • penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation.
  • penetrants are generally 20 known in the art. and include, for example, for transmucosal administration, detergents, bile salts, and fusidic acid derivatives.
  • Transmucosal administration can be accomplished through the use of nasal sprays or suppositories
  • the active compounds are formulated into ointments, salves, gels, or creams as generally known in the art. Most preferably, active compound is delivered to a subject by intravenous injection.
  • the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • a controlled release formulation including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent 30 to those skilled in the art.
  • the materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Co ⁇ oration and Nova Pharmaceuticals, Inc.
  • Liposomal suspensions (including liposomes targeted to infected cells with monoclonal antibodies to viral antigens) can also be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No 4,522,81 1
  • the active compound e.g, a Pep 133-related peptide
  • a microchip drug delivery device Such devices are useful for controlled delivery of proteinaceous compositions into the bloodstream, cerebrospinal fluid, lymph, or tissue of an individual without subjecting such compositions to digestion or subjecting the individual to injection
  • Methods of using microchip drug delivery devices are described in US Patents 6, 123,861 and 5.797,898 and US Patent application 200201 19176A1. 5 It is especially advantageous to formulate oral or preferably parenteral compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage.
  • Dosage unit form as used herein refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subject to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier.
  • 10 dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on the unique characteristics of the active compound and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an active compound for the treatment of individuals. , . • -, • > • ⁇ • . . • .
  • LD50 the dose lethal to 50% of the population
  • ED50 the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population
  • the dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50.
  • Compounds with large therapeutic indices are preferred. While compounds that exhibit toxic side effects may be used, care should be taken to design a
  • the data obtained from the cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans.
  • the dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity.
  • the dosage may vary
  • the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays.
  • a dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC50 (i.e, the concentration of the test compound, which achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture.
  • Levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.
  • compositions can be included in a container, pack, or dispenser together with instructions for administration.
  • a Pep 133 -related peptide of the invention is synthesized.
  • Peptide fragment intermediates are first synthesized and then assembled into the desired polypeptide.
  • a Pep 133-related peptide can initially be prepared in, e.g. 5 fragments, selected to have a Cys residue at the N-terminus of the fragment to be coupled.
  • Fragment 1 is initially coupled to fragment 2 to give a first product, then after preparative HPLC purification, the first product is coupled to fragment 3 to give a second product. After preparative HPLC purification, the second product is coupled to fragment 4 to give a third product. Finally, after preparative HPLC purification, the third product is coupled to fragment 5 to give, the desired polypeptide, which is purified and refolded. ; - ⁇ ' • - f ' .-, - -. ,• - • .- -> ;. ⁇ ,v ' ⁇ ••; > ⁇ x • ⁇ • ⁇ - ,
  • N-terminal Cys residues of fragments 2 through 5 are protected by coupling a Boc-thioprohne (Boc-SPr, i.e. Boc-L-thioproline) to the terminus of the respective chains instead of a Cys having conventional N ⁇ or S p protection, e.g. Brik et al, J. Org. Chem, 65: 3829-3835 (2000). Peptide synthesis.
  • Boc-SPr i.e. Boc-L-thioproline
  • Solid-phase synthesis is performed on a custom-modified 433A peptide synthesizer from Applied Biosystems, using in situ neutralization 2-(lH-benzotriazol-l-yl)- 1,1, 1,3,3 - tetramethyluronium hexafluoro-phosphate (HBTU) activation protocols for stepwise Boc chemistry chain elongation, as described by Schnolzer et al, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res, 40: 180-193 (1992).
  • HBTU 2-(lH-benzotriazol-l-yl)- 1,1, 1,3,3 - tetramethyluronium hexafluoro-phosphate
  • Each synthetic cycle consists of N ⁇ -Boc -removal by a 1 to 2 min treatment with neat TFA, a 1-min DMF flow wash, a 10-min coupling time with 2.0 mmol of preactivated Boc-amino acid in the presence of excess DIEA and a second DMF flow wash.
  • N ⁇ -Boc-amino acids (2 mmol) are preactivated for 3min with 1.8mmol HBTU (0.5M in DMF) in the presence of excess DIEA (6mmol).
  • a dichloromethane flow wash is used before and after deprotection using TFA, to prevent possible high temperature (TFA/DMF)-cataIyzed pyrrolidone carboxylic acid formation.
  • Side-chain protected amino acids are Boc-Arg(p-toluenesulfonyl)-OH, Boc-Asn(xanthyl)-OH, Boc-Asp(0-cyclohexyl)-OH, Boc-Cys(4-methylbenzyl)-OH, Boc-Glu(0- cyclohexyl)-OH, Boc-His(dinitrophenylbenzyl)-OH, Boc-Lys(2-Cl-Z)-OH, Boc-Ser(benzyl)-OH, Boc-Thr(benzyl)-OH, Boc-T ⁇ (formyl)-OH and Boc-Tyr(2-Br-Z)-OH (O ⁇ agen Pharma, Heidelberg, Germany).
  • Fragment 1 is synthesized on Boc-Leu-0-CH 2 -Pam resin (0.71mmol/g of loaded resin), while for Fragments 2 through 5 machine-assisted synthesis is started on the Boc-Xaa-S-CH 2 -CO-Leu-Pam resin.
  • This resin is obtained by the coupling of S-acetylthioglycolic acid pentafluorophenylester to a Leu-PAM resin under standard conditions. The resulting resin is used as a starting resin for peptide chain elongation on a 0.2 mmol scale after removal of the acetyl protecting group with a 30min treatment with 10% mercaptoethanol, 10% piperidine in DMF.
  • the peptide fragments are deprotected and cleaved from the resin by treatment with anhydrous hydrogen fluoride for lhr at 0°C with 5% p-cresol as a scavenger
  • anhydrous hydrogen fluoride for lhr at 0°C with 5% p-cresol as a scavenger In all cases except Fragment 1, the imidazole side chain 2,4 ! -dinitrophenyl (DNP) . protecting groups remain on His residues because the DNP-removal procedure is incompatible with ( C-terminal thioester groups. However DNP is gradually removed by thiols during the ligation reaction, yielding unprotected His.
  • peptide fragments are precipitated with ice-cold diethylether, dissolved in aqueous acetonitrile and lyophilized.
  • the peptide fragments are purified by RP-HPLC with a C18 column from Waters by using linear gradients of buffer B (acetonitile/0.1% trifluoroacetic acid) in buffer A (H 2 O/0.1% t ⁇ fluoroacetic acid) and UV detection at 214nm. Samples are analyzed by electrospray mass spectrometry (ESMS) using an Esquire instrument (Brucker, Bremen , Germany), or like instrument.
  • ESMS electrospray mass spectrometry
  • the ligation of unprotected fragments is performed as follows: the dry peptides are dissolved in equimolar amounts in 6M guanidine hydrochloride (GuHCl), 0.2M phosphate, pH 7.5 in order to get a final peptide concentration of 1-8 mM at a pH around 7, and 1% benzylmercaptan, 1% thiophenol is added. Usually, the reaction is carried out overnight and is monitored by HPLC and electrospray mass spectrometry.
  • the ligation product is subsequently treated to remove protecting groups still present
  • the formyl group of T ⁇ is cleaved by shifting the pH of the solution up to 9.0 with hydrazine and incubating for lh at 37° C Opening of the N-terminal thiazolidine ring further required the addition of solid methoxamine to a 0.5M final concentration at pH3.5 and a further incubation for 2h at 37°C.
  • a 10-fold excess of Tris(2-carboxyethyl)phosphine is added before preparative HPLC purification Fractions containing the polypeptide chain are identified by ESMS, pooled and lyophilized.
  • the ligation of fragments 4 and 5 is performed at pH7.0 in 6 M GuHCl.
  • the concentration of each reactant is 8mM, and 1% benzylmercaptan and 1% thiophenol were added to create a reducing environment and to facilitate the ligation reaction.
  • An almost quantitative ligation reaction is observed after overnight stirring at 37°C
  • 0-NH 2 .HCl is added as a powder to a 0.1 M final concentration and hydrazine is added to shift the pH to 9.0, for the removal of the formyl group of any T ⁇ residues.
  • O-NH 2 .HCl is further added to the solution to get a 0.5M final concentration, and the pH adjusted to 3.5 in order to open the N- terminal thiazolidine ring.
  • reaction mixture is subsequently treated with a 10-fold excess of T ⁇ s(2- carboxyethylphosphine) over the peptide fragment and after 15min, the ligation product is purified using the preparative HPLC (e.g , C4, 20-60% CH 3 CN, 0.5% per min), lyophilised, and stored at - 20°C
  • Example 2 Preparation of antibody compositions Substantially pure Pep 133-related peptide or a portion thereof is obtained. The concentration of protein in the final preparation is adjusted, for example, by concentration on an Amicon filter device, to the level of a few micrograms per ml. Monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies to the protein are then prepared as described in the sections titled "Monoclonal antibodies” and "Polyclonal antibodies.” Briefly, to produce an anti-Pep 133 related peptide monoclonal antibody, a mouse is repetitively inoculated with a few micrograms of the Pep 133-related peptide or a portion thereof over a period of a few weeks.
  • the mouse is then sacrificed, and the antibody producing cells of the spleen isolated.
  • the spleen cells are fused by means of polyethylene glycol with mouse myeloma cells, and the excess unfused cells destroyed by growth of the system on selective media comprising aminopterin (HAT media).
  • HAT media aminopterin
  • the successfully fused cells are diluted and aliquots of the dilution placed in wells of a microtiter plate where growth of the culture is continued.
  • Antibody-producing clones are identified by detection of antibody in the supernatant fluid of the wells by immunoassay procedures, such as ELISA, as originally described by Engvall, E, Meth. Enzymol. 70. 419 (1980). Selected positive clones can be expanded and their monoclonal antibody product harvested for use. Detailed procedures for monoclonal antibody production are described in Davis, L. et al. Basic Methods in Molecular Biology Elsevier, New York. Section 21-2.
  • polyclonal antiserum containing antibodies to heterogeneous epitopes in the Pep 133 -related peptide or a portion thereof are prepared by immunizing a mouse with the Pep 133-related peptide or a portion thereof, which can be unmodified or modified to enhance immunogenicity.
  • Any suitable nonhuman animal preferably a non-human mammal, may be selected including rat, rabbit, goat, or horse.
  • Antibody preparations prepared according to either the monoclonal or the polyclonal protocol are useful in quantitative immunoassays which determine concentrations of Pep 133-related peptide in biological samples; or they are also used semi-quantitatively or qualitatively to identify the presence of antigen in a biological sample.
  • the antibodies may also be used in therapeutic compositions for killing cells expressing the protein or reducing the levels of the protein in the body.

Abstract

The invention provides novel human secreted peptides having an amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NOS 3, 5 and 7. The invention also provides the amidated forms of these polypeptides as SEQ ID NOS 4, 6 and 8, and compositions including polypeptides, polynucleotides, and antibodies specific for these peptides. Also provided are methods for making such compositions, and methods of using the compositions of the invention for diagnosis, prognosis, and treatment of diseases.

Description

SECRETED PEPTIDES
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The invention relates to secreted active peptides. isolated polynucleotides encoding such peptides, polymorphic variants thereof, and the use of said nucleic acids and peptides or compositions thereof in detection assays, for disease diagnosis, for disease treatment and for drug development
BACKGROUND
Interferons belong to the cytokine super-family of extracellular proteins involved in natural immunity. Interferon expression is usually induced by viral infection or inflammation (Charles A. - Janeway Jr., et al. , Immunobiology , 2001, Garland Publishing). The result of this induction
- includes activation of natural killer cells, inducing infected cells into a resistance state, triggering ' -apoptosis and regulating immune functions and cellular proliferation The latter implies that ■ -' interferons have an anti-tumoral activity (Harada H, et al., Bioc mie (1998),80:641-50).
There are two different types of interferons: type I (alpha / beta / omega / theta) and type II (gamma). Both types are produced by lymphocytes, fibroblasts and the T helper cells (Thl)
The secreted active peptides of the invention are induced primarily by human alpha and beta interferons. Interferon beta plays a specific role in antitumoral activity (Xu L, et al., Human Gene Therapy, (1998);9 2699-2708; Horikoshi T, et al., Journal of Dermatology (1995);22(9) 631-6) and allograft rejection (Tovey MG et al., J. Leukocyte Biol., (1996) 59 : 512-517) and is also an immuno-modulator used for the treatment of autoimmune diseases such as multiple sclerosis (Guthikonda P, et al., Journal Neurolmmunology, (1998),82(2): 133-9, Banner D, et al., Neuroscience Letters, (2002), 326 125-128).
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention is directed to compositions related to secreted active peptides, designated herein "Pepl33-related" peptides. Such compositions include Pepl33-related peptides, having an amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 3 through 8, Pepl33-related peptides precursors, Pep l33-related antibodies, including monoclonal antibodies and other binding compositions derived therefrom, and methods of making and using these compositions. Pep 133 -related peptides precursors of the invention include the Pep 133 -related peptides precursors of SEQ ID NO: 1 and 2. In another aspect, the invention includes polypeptides comprising a sequence at least 95 percent identical to a sequence selected from SEQ ID NOs: 3 through 8 Preferably, the invention includes polypeptides having at least 97 percent, and more preferably at least 98 percent, and still more preferably at least 99 percent, identity with any one of the sequences selected from SEQ ID NOs 3 through 8. Most preferably, the invention includes polypeptides comprising a sequence at least 99 percent identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs: 3 through 8.
A preferred embodiment of the invention includes PepI33-related peptides having a posttranslational modification, such as an amidation, phosphorylation, glycosylation, acetylation, or an N- or O- linked carbohydrate group. Additionally preferred are Pep 133-related peptides with intra- or inter-molecular interactions, e.g., disulfide and hydrogen bonds, that result in higher order structures. Also preferred are Pep 133-reIated peptides that result from differential mRNA processing or splicing.
In an additional aspect, the invention includes modified Pep 133-related peptides. Such modifications include protecting/blocking groups, .linkage to an antibody molecule or other cellular ligand, and detectable labels, such as an enzymatic, fluorescent, isotopic or affinity label to allow for detection and isolation of the protein. Chemical modifications may be carried out by known techniques, including but not limited, to specific chemical .cleavage by cyanogen bromide, trypsin, chymotrypsin, papain, V8 protease, NaBH4, acetylation, formylation, oxidation, reduction, or metabolic synthesis in the presence of tunicamycin. Also provided by the invention are chemically modified derivatives of the polypeptides of the invention which may provide additional advantages such as increased solubility, stability and circulating time of the polypeptide, or decreased immunogenicity (e g., water soluble polymers such as polyethylene glycol, ethylene glycol/propylene glycol copolymers, carboxymethylcellulose, dextran, polyvinyl alcohol). Pep 133-related peptides are modified at random positions within the molecule, or at predetermined positions within the molecule and may include one, two, three or more attached chemical moieties.
A preferred aspect of the invention provides a composition comprising an isolated Pepl33- related peptide, i.e., a Pep 133-related peptide free from proteins or protein isoforms having a significantly different isoelectric point or a significantly different apparent molecular weight from the Pep 133-related peptide. The isoelectric point and molecular weight of a Pep 133-related peptide may be indicated by affinity and size-based separation chromatography, 2-dimentional gel analysis, and mass spectrometry.
In a preferred aspect, the invention provides particular polypeptide species that comprise an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs:3-8. Preferably, the particular polypeptide species further comprises contiguous amino acid sequence from SEQ ID NO. l . Preferred species are polypeptides that i) comprise an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs:3-8; ii) appear in human blood serum; and iii) result from proteolytic processing of the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 1.
In another aspect, the invention includes polynucleotides coding for a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO: 3 through 8, antisense oligonucleotides complementary to such sequences, oligonucleotides complementary to Pep 133 gene sequences useful in diagnostic and analytical assays, such as primers for polymerase chain reactions (PCRs), and vectors for expressing Pep 133 -related peptides.
In another aspect, the invention includes primer pairs for carrying out a PCR to amplify a segment of a polynucleotide of the invention Each primer of a pair is an oligonucleotide having a length of between 15 and 30 nucleotides such that i) one primer of the pair forms a perfectly matched duplex with one strand of a polynucleotide of the invention and the other primer of the pair forms a perfectly matched duplex with the complementary strand of the same polynucleotide, and ii) the primers of a pair form such perfectly matched duplexes at sites on the polynucleotide that are separated by a distance of between 10, and 2500 nucleotides. Preferably, the annealing temperature of each primer of a pair with its respective complementary sequence is substantially the same.
The invention further includes methods of using Pep 133-related compositions, including antisense and antibody compounds, to treat disorders associated with aberrant expression of the Pep 133-related peptides of SEQ ID NO: 3 through 8 in an individual, and methods of using Pep 133- related compositions, including primers complementary to the Pep 133 gene and/or messenger RNA and anti-Pep 133-related antibodies, for detecting and measuring quantities of the Pep 133-related peptides in tissues and biological fluids. The invention also further includes methods of screening for compounds that inhibit or increase the expression of Pep 133-related peptides, as well as methods of screening for compounds that interact with and/or inhibit or increase the activity of Pep 133- related peptides. The invention further encompasses compounds thus identified, as well as compositions thereof.
In another aspect, the invention includes isolated antibodies specific for any of the polypeptides, peptide fragments, or peptides described above. Preferably, the antibodies of the invention are monoclonal antibodies. Further preferred are antibodies that bind to a Pep 133-related peptide exclusively, that is, antibodies that do not recognize other polypeptides with high affinity. Anti-Pep 133-related peptide antibodies have purification, diagnostic and therapeutic applications, particularly in with respect to Pep 133-related peptide-related disorders. Preferred anti- Pepl33- related peptide antibodies for purification and diagnosis are attached to a label group Treatment methods include, but are not limited to, those that employ antibodies or antibody-derived compositions specific for a Pep 133-related antigen. Diagnostic methods for detecting Pepl33- related peptides in specific tissue samples, and for detecting levels of expression of Pep 133-related peptides in tissues, also form part of the invention. Compositions comprising one or more antibodies described above, together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier are also within the scope of the invention. 5 In another aspect, the invention includes natural variants of the Pep 133-related peptide having a frequency in a selected population of at least two percent. More preferably, such natural variant has a frequency in a selected population of at least five percent, and still more preferably, at least ten percent. Most preferably, such natural variant has a frequency in a selected population of at least twenty percent. The selected population may be any recognized population of study in the
10 field of population genetics. Preferably, the selected population is Caucasian, Negroid, or Asian More preferably, the selected population is French, German, English, Spanish, Swiss, Japanese, Chinese, Irish, Korean, Singaporean, Icelandic, North American, Israeli, Arab, Turkish, Greek, Italian, Polish, Pacific Islander, Finnish, Norwegian, Swedish, Estonian, Austrian, or Indian. More . preferably, the selected population is Icelandic, Saami, Finnish, French of Caucasian ancestry,
,15- Swiss, Singaporean of Chinese ancestry, Korean, Japanese, Quebecian, North American Pima Indians, Pennsylvanian Amish and Amish Mennonite, Newfoundlander, or Polynesian.
In another aspect, the invention provides a vector comprising DNA encoding a Pep 133- related peptide. The invention also includes host cells and transgenic non human animals comprising such a vector. There is also provided a method of making a Pep 133-related peptides or Pepl33-
20 related peptides precursor. The method comprises the steps of (a) providing a host cell containing an expression vector as disclosed above; (b) culturing the host cell under conditions whereby the DNA segment is expressed; and (c) recovering the protein encoded by the DNA segment. Another preferred method comprises the steps of: (a) providing a host cell capable of expressing a Pep 133- related peptide; (b) culturing said host cell under conditions that allow expression of said Pep 133-
25 related peptide; and (c) recovering said Pep 133-related peptide. Within one embodiment the expression vector further comprises a secretory signal sequence operably linked to the DNA segment, the cell secretes the protein into a culture medium, and the protein is recovered from the medium. An especially preferred method of making a Pep 133-related peptide includes chemical synthesis using standard peptide synthesis techniques, as described in the section titled "Chemical
30 Manufacture of Pep 133-related compositions" and in Example 1.
In still a further aspect, the invention includes pharmaceutical compositions and formulations comprising a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO: 3 through 8, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier compound. Further aspects of the invention are also described in the specification and in the claims.
35 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE SEQUENCE LISTING
Figure imgf000006_0001
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION _
The present invention described in detail below provides methods, compositions, and kits t , useful for screening, diagnosis, and treatment of a Pep 133-related peptide disorder in a mammalian individual; for identifying individuals most likely to respond to a particular therapeutic treatment; for screening Pep 133-related peptide modulators; and for drug development. When the invention is used for drug development, e.g , to characterize a Pep 133-related modulator, the body fluid analyzed for the level of at least one Pep 133-related peptide is preferably from a non-human mammal. The nonhuman mammal is preferably one in which the induction of a Type I IFN response by endogenous and/or exogenous agents is predictive of the induction of such a response a human. Rodents and primates are particularly suitable. For clarity of disclosure, and not by way of limitation, the invention will be described with respect to the analysis of blood plasma samples. However, as one skilled in the art will appreciate, the assays and techniques described below can be applied to other biological fluid samples (e.g. cerebrospinal fluid, lymph, bile, plasma, saliva or urine) or tissue samples from an individual at risk of having or developing a Pep 133 -related peptide disorder The methods and compositions of the present invention are useful for screening, diagnosis and prognosis of a living individual, but may also be used for postmortem diagnosis in an individual, for example, to identify family members who are at risk of developing the same disorder.
Definitions
As used herein, the term "nucleic acids" and "nucleic acid molecule" is intended to include DNA molecules (e.g., cDNA or genomic DNA) and RNA molecules (e.g., mRNA) and analogs of the DNA or RNA generated using nucleotide analogs. The nucleic acid molecule can be single- stranded or double-stranded, but preferably is double-stranded DNA. Throughout the present specification, the expression "nucleotide sequence" may be employed to designate indifferently a polynucleotide or a nucleic acid. More precisely, the expression "nucleotide sequence" encompasses the nucleic material itself and is thus not restricted to the sequence information (i e. the succession of letters chosen among the four base letters) that biochemically characterizes a specific DNA or RNA molecule Also, used interchangeably herein are terms "nucleic acids", "oligonucleotides", and "polynucleotides".
An "isolated" nucleic acid molecule is one which is separated from other nucleic acid molecules which are present in the natural source of the nucleic acid. Preferably, an "isolated" nucleic acid is free of sequences which naturally flank the nucleic acid (i.e , sequences located at the 5' and 3' ends of the nucleic acid) in the genomic DNA of the organism from which the nucleic acid is derived. For example, in various embodiments, the isolated Pep 133-related nucleic acid molecule can contain less than about 5 kb, 4 kb, 3 kb, 2 kb, 1 kb, 0.5 kb or 0.1 kb of nucleotide sequences which naturally flank the nucleic acid molecule in genomic DNA of the cell from which the nucleic acid is derived Moreover, an "isolated" nucleic acid molecule, such as a cDNA molecule, can be substantially free of other cellular material, or culture medium when produced by recombinant techniques, or substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized. A nucleic acid molecule of the present invention can be isolated using standard molecular biology techniques and the sequence information provided herein. Using all or a portion of the nucleic acid, as a hybridization probe, Pep 133-related nucleic acid molecules can be isolated using standard hybridization and cloning techniques (e.g., as described in Sambrook, J., Fritsh, E. F., and Maniatis, T. Molecular Cloning. A Laboratory Manual. 2nd, ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1989).
A nucleic acid of the invention can be amplified using cDNA, mRNA or alternatively, genomic DNA, as a template and appropriate oligonucleotide primers according to standard PCR amplification techniques. The nucleic acid so amplified can be cloned into an appropriate vector and characterized by DNA sequence analysis. Furthermore, oligonucleotides corresponding to Pep 133- related nucleotide sequences can be prepared by standard synthetic techniques, e.g , using an automated DNA synthesizer. As used herein, the term "hybridizes to" is intended to describe conditions for moderate stringency or high stringency hybridization, preferably where the hybridization and washing conditions permit nucleotide sequences at least 60% homologous to each other to remain hybridized to each other Preferably, the conditions are such that sequences at least about 70%, more preferably at least about 80%, even more preferably at least about 85%, 90%, 95% or 98% homologous to each other typically remain hybridized to each other. Stringent conditions are known to those skilled in the art and can be found in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, N.Y (1989), 6.3.1-6.3.6. A preferred, non-limiting example of stringent hybridization conditions are as follows: the hybridization step is realized at 65°C in the presence of 6 x SSC buffer, 5 x Denhardt's solution, 0,5% SDS and lOOμg/ml of salmon sperm DNA The hybridization step is followed by four washing steps-
- two washings during 5 min, preferably at 65°C in a 2 x SSC and 0.1%SDS buffer;
- one washing during 30 min, preferably at 65°C in a 2 x SSC and 0.1% SDS buffer,
- one washing during 10 min, preferably at 65°C in a 0.1 x SSC and 0.1%SDS buffer, these hybridization conditions being suitable for a nucleic acid molecule of about 20 nucleotides in length. It will be appreciated that the hybridization conditions described above are to be adapted according to the length of the desired nucleic acid, following techniques well known to the one skilled in the art, for example be adapted according to the teachings disclosed in Hames B.D. and Higgins S.J. (1985) Nucleic Acid Hybridization: A Practical Approach. Hames and Higgins Ed., IRL Press, ' Oxford; and Current Protocols in Molecular Biology. , . " , .''Percent homology" is used herein to refer to both nucleic acid sequences and amino acid , sequences. To determine the percent homology of two amino acid sequences or of two nucleic acids, the sequences are aligned for optimal comparison purposes (e.g., gaps can be introduced in the sequence of a first amino acid or nucleic acid sequence for optimal alignment with a second amino or nucleic acid sequence and non-homologous sequences can be disregarded for comparison purposes). In a preferred embodiment, the length of a reference sequence aligned for comparison purposes is at least 30%, preferably at least 40%, more preferably at least 50%, even more preferably at least 60%, and even more preferably at least 70%, 80%, 90% or 95% of the length of the reference sequence The amino acid residues or nucleotides at corresponding amino acid positions or nucleotide positions are then compared. When a position in the first sequence is occupied by the same amino acid residue or nucleotide as the corresponding position in the second sequence, then the molecules are homologous at that position (i.e., as used herein amino acid or nucleic acid "identity" is equivalent to amino acid or nucleic acid "homology").
The percent homology between the two sequences is a function of the number of identical positions shared by the sequences (i e., % homology=# of identical positions/total # of positions 100).
The comparison of sequences and determination of percent homology between two sequences can be accomplished using a mathematical algorithm. A preferred, non-limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for the comparison of sequences is the algorithm of Karlin and Altschul ( 1990) Proc. Natl Acad Sci. USA 87:2264-68, modified as in Karlin and Altschul (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5873-77. Such an algorithm is incorporated into the NBLAST and XBLAST programs (version 2.0) of Altschul, et al. (1990) J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-10. BLAST nucleotide searches can be performed with the NBLAST program, score=100, wordlength=12 to obtain nucleotide sequences homologous to Pep 133-related nucleic acid molecules of the invention. BLAST protein searches can be performed with the XBLAST program, score=50, wordlength=3 to obtain amino acid sequences homologous to Pep 133-related peptide molecules of the invention. To obtain gapped alignments for comparison purposes, Gapped BLAST can be utilized as described in Altschul et al., (1997) Nucleic Acids Research 25(17):3389-3402. When utilizing BLAST and Gapped BLAST programs, the default parameters of the respective programs (e.g., XBLAST and NBLAST) can be used See http //www.ncbi. nlm.nih.gov. Another preferred, non-limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for the comparison of sequences is the algorithm of Myers and Miller, CABIOS (1989). Such an algorithm is incorporated into the ALIGN program (version 2.0) which is part of the GCG sequence alignment software package. When utilizing the ALIGN program for comparing amino acid sequences, a PAM120 weight residue table, a gap length penalty of 12, and a gap penalty of 4 can be used. .- , • ' !• . . - , " • . The term "polypeptide" refers to a polymer of amino„acids without regard to the length of ■ the polymer; thus, peptides, oligopep tides, and proteins are included within the definition of polypeptide. This term also does not specify or exclude post-translational modifications of polypeptides. For example, polypeptides include those with covalent attachment of glycosyl, acetyl, phosphate, amide, lipid, carboxyl, acyl or carbohydrate groups. Also included within the definition are polypeptides which contain one or more analogs of an amino acid (including, for example, non- naturally occurring amino acids, amino acids which only occur naturally in an unrelated biological system, modified amino acids from mammalian systems etc.), polypeptides with substituted linkages, as well as other modifications known in the art, both naturally occurring and non-naturally occurring. The term "protein" as used herein may be used synonymously with the term "polypeptide" or may refer to, in addition, a complex of two or more polypeptides which may be linked by bonds other than peptide bonds, for example, such polypeptides making up the protein may be linked by disulfide bonds The term "protein" may also comprehend a family of polypeptides having identical amino acid sequences but different post-translational modifications, particularly as may be added when such proteins are expressed in eukaryotic hosts.
An "isolated" or "purified" protein or biologically active portion thereof is substantially free of cellular material or other contaminating proteins from the cell or tissue source from which the Pep 133 -related peptide, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof is derived, or substantially free from chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized. The language "substantially free of cellular material" includes preparations of a protein according to the invention (e.g. Pep 133-related peptide, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof) in which the protein is separated from cellular components of the cells from which it is isolated or recombinantly produced. In one embodiment, the language "substantially free of cellular material" includes preparations of a protein according to the invention having less than about 30% (by dry weight) of protein other than the Pep 133 -related peptide (also referred to herein as a "contaminating protein"), more preferably less than about 20% of protein other than the protein according to the invention, still more preferably less than about 10% of protein other than the protein according to the invention, and most preferably less than about 5% of protein other than the protein according to the invention. When the protein according to the invention or biologically active portion thereof is recombinantly produced, it is also preferably substantially free of culture medium, i.e., culture medium represents less than about 20%, more preferably less than about 10%, and most preferably less than about 5% of the volume of the protein preparation.
The language "substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals" includes v preparations of Pep 133-related peptide, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof in which the protein is separated from chemical precursors or other chemicals which are involved in the, synthesis of the protein. In one embodiment, the language "substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals" includes preparations of a Pep 133-related peptide having less than about 30% (by dry weight) of chemical precursors or non-Pep 133-related peptides chemicals, more preferably less than about 20% chemical precursors or non-Pep 133-related peptides chemicals, still more preferably less than about 10% chemical precursors or non-Pep 133-related peptides chemicals, and most preferably less than about 5% chemical precursors or non-Pep 133-related peptides chemicals. The term "recombinant polypeptide" is used herein to refer to polypeptides that have been artificially designed and which comprise at least two polypeptide sequences that are not found as contiguous polypeptide sequences in their initial natural environment, or to refer to polypeptides which have been expressed from a recombinant polynucleotide. The term "Pep 133 peptide" or "Pep 133-related peptide" refers to a peptide comprising the sequence described by those selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs: 3-8. Such peptide may be post-translationally modified (e.g., amidated, phosphorylated, acylated, or glycosylated). Pep 133 peptide may also contain other structural or chemical modifications such as disulfide linkages or amino acid side chain interactions such as hydrogen and amide bonds that result in complex secondary and tertiary structures. The terms "Pep 133-related peptide" and "Pep 133-related peptides" are used herein to embrace any and all of the peptides, polypeptides and proteins of the present invention. These include mutant polypeptides, such as deletion, addition, swap, or truncation mutants, fusion polypeptides comprising such polypeptides, and polypeptide fragments of at least three, but preferably 8, 10, 12, 15, or 21 contiguous amino acids of the sequences of SEQ ID NOs:3-8. The invention embodies polypeptides encoded by the nucleic acid sequences of the Pep 133 gene or messenger RNA, as well as the Pep 133 -related peptides from humans, including isolated or purified Pep 133-related peptides consisting of, consisting essentially of, or comprising the sequence of SEQ ID NOs 3-8. Preferred Pep 133-related peptides retain at least one biological activity of Pepl33 The term "biological activity" as used herein refers to any function carried out by Pep 133.
These include but are not limited to: (1) antigenicity, or the ability to bind an anti-Pepl 33-related peptide specific antibody; (2) immunogenicity, or the ability to generate an anti-Pepl 33-related peptide specific antibody; (3) mediating cell proliferation or cell cycle; (4) interacting with a Pep 133- related target molecule, preferably a protein, (5) circulating in human plasma; (6) mediating a Type I IFN -induced anti-cell growth response; (7) mediating a Type I IFN-induced anti -inflammatory response; (8) displaying an amidyl modification; and (9) undergoing dibasic cleavage.
Another aspect of the invention pertains to anti-Pep 133-related antibodies. The term - "antibody", as used herein refers to immunoglobulin molecules and immunologically active portions . of immunoglobulin molecules, i.e., molecules that contain an antigen binding site which specifically - ■ binds (immunoreacts with) an antigen, ,such as a Pep 133 -related pep tide, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof. Examples of immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules include F(ab) and F(ab')2 fragments which can be generated by treating the antibody with an enzyme such as pepsin. The invention provides polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies that bind a Pep 133-related peptide, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof. The term "monoclonal antibody" or "monoclonal antibody composition", as used herein, refers to a population of antibody molecules that contain only one species of an antigen binding site capable of immunoreacting with a particular epitope of a Pep 133-related peptide. A monoclonal antibody composition thus typically displays a single binding affinity for a particular Pep 133-related peptide with which it immunoreacts. Preferred anti-Pep 133-related antibodies recognize an amidated form of a Pep 133 -related peptide .
As used herein, a "label group" is any compound that, when attached to a polynucleotide or polypeptide (including antibodies), allows for detection or purification of said polynucleotide or polypeptide. Label groups may be detected or purified directly or indirectly by a secondary compound, including an antibody specific for said label group. Useful label groups include
32 35 3 125 radioisotopes (e.g., P, S, H, I), fluorescent compounds (e.g., 5-bromodesoxyuπdιn, umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride, phycoerythrin acetylaminofluorene, digoxigenin), luminescent compounds (e.g., luminol, GFP, luciferin, aequorin), enzymes or enzyme co-factor detectable labels (e.g., peroxidase, luciferase, alkaline phosphatase, galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase), or compounds that are recognized by a secondary factor such as strepavidin, GST, or biotin. Preferably, a label group is attached to a polynucleotide or polypeptide in such a way as to not interfere with the biological activity of the polynucleotide or polypeptide
Radioisotopes may be detected by direct counting of radioemmission, film exposure, or by 5 scintillation counting, for example. Enzymatic labels may be detected by determination of conversion of an appropriate substrate to product, usually causing a fluorescent reaction. Fluorescent and luminescent compounds and reactions may be detected by, e.g., radioemmission, fluorescent microscopy, fluorescent activated cell sorting, or a luminometer.
As used herein, the term "vector" refers to a nucleic acid molecule capable of transporting
10 another nucleic acid to which it has been linked. One type of vector is a "plasmid", which refers to a circular double stranded DNA loop into which additional DNA segments can be ligated. Another type of vector is a viral vector, wherein additional DNA segments can be ligated into the viral genome. Certain vectors are capable of autonomous replication in a host cell into which they are ' • - . introduced (e.g., bacterial vectors having a bacterial origin of replication and episomal mammalian
;15. , vectors). Other vectors (e.g., non-episomal mammalian vectors) are integrated into the genome of a host cell upon introduction into the host cell, and thereby are replicated along with the host genome Moreover, certain vectors are capable of directing the expression of genes to which they are operatively linked. Such vectors are referred to herein as "expression vectors". In general, expression vectors of utility in recombinant DNA techniques are often in the form of plasmids. In the present
20 specification, "plasmid" and "vector" can be used interchangeably as the plasmid is the most commonly used form of vector. However, the invention is intended to include such other forms of expression vectors, such as viral vectors (e.g., replication defective retroviruses, adenoviruses and adeno-associated viruses), which serve equivalent functions.
As used herein, "effective amount" describes the amount of an agent, preferably a Pep 133-
25 related peptide of the invention, sufficient to have a desired effect. As an example, an effective amount of a Pep 133-related peptide is the amount of the peptide or biologically active fragment thereof required to reduce cell growth by 5% or 10%. The effective amount for a particular patient may vary depending on such factors as the diagnostic method of the symptom being measured, the state of the condition being treated, the overall health of the patient, method of administration, and
30 the severity of side-effects.
Pep 133-related peptides of the invention
The Pep 133-related peptides of the invention are listed as SEQ ID NO: 3 through 8. These secreted peptides are predicted to be active peptides released from their precursors by dibasic 35 cleavage. Furthermore, the peptides of SEQ ID NO' 3, 5 and 7 may possess a C-terminal amidation. Amidation of bioactive peptides is well-known (Pπgge ST, et al , Cell Mol Life Sci 2000 Aug;57(8- 9)- 1236-59), and in this case, the C-terminal alanine is amidated and the adjacent glycme donates the amide group The conversion is a two step process: peptidyl glycine is converted to peptidyl alpha- hyroxyglycine by peptidyl glycine alpha-hydroxylating monooxygenase (PHM), then this is 5 converted to the peptidyl amide by peptidyl alpha-hydroxyglycing alpha-amidating lyase (PAL) with the simultaneous production of glyoxylic acid. The conversion could possibly occur after secretion in the human plasma (Kapuscinski M, et al., C n. Endocnnol (Oxf) 1993 Jul;39(l):51-8) The Pep 133-related peptides are shown herein to possess sequence identity with a sub-region of an interferon-induced predicted protein that exists as multiple splice variant forms (Turri MG, et al.,
10 Nucleic Acids Res 1995;23(11): 1854-61). Each of the peptides from SEQ ID NO' 3, 5 and 7 corresponds to the product of the cleavage at a dibasic site of the mature form of one of the splice variant forms SEQ ID NO: 1 and 2 represent the precursor and mature polypeptide, respectively, .giving rise to the Pep 133-related peptide from SEQ ID NO' 3.
-, , < -; \ Pep 133-related peptides are induced by response to human alpha and beta interferons, but.
15 not to the.gamma form (Kelly JM, et al., EMBO J- 1986 Jul; 5(7): 1601-6). A homologous transcript has been characterised from chimpanzees (Kato T, et al., Virology 1992 Oct; 190(2).856-60), but no role was known for this precusor (Turri MG, et al., Nucleic Acids Res 1995 Jun 11;23(1 1): 1854- 61). It is apparent from the present invention that the human precursor is processed in vivo to yield secreted active peptides. The Pep 133-related peptides of the invention, as part of the Type I
20 interferon response, play a role in antitumoral activity and immuno-modulation.
The terms "Pep 133-related peptide" and "Pep 133-related peptides" are used herein to embrace any and all of the peptides, polypeptides and proteins of the present invention. Also forming part of the invention are polypeptides encoded by the polynucleotides of the invention, as well as fusion polypeptides comprising such polypeptides. The invention embodies polypeptides
25 encoded by the nucleic acid sequences of the Pep 133 gene, as well as the Pep 133-related peptides from humans, including isolated or purified Pepl33-related peptides consisting of, consisting essentially of, or comprising the sequence of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8.
The present invention embodies isolated, purified, and recombinant polypeptides comprising a contiguous span of at least 3 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids. In preferred
30 embodiments the contiguous stretch of amino acids comprises the site of a mutation or functional mutation, including a deletion, addition, swap or truncation of the amino acids in the Pep 133-related peptide sequence. The invention also concerns the polypeptide encoded by the Pep 133-related nucleotide sequences of the invention, or a complementary sequence thereof or a fragment thereof. One aspect of the invention pertains to isolated Pep 133-related peptides, and biologically
35 active portions thereof, as well as polypeptide fragments suitable for use as immunogens to raise anti-Pep 133-related antibodies In one embodiment, native Pep 133-related peptides can be isolated from cells or tissue sources by an appropriate purification scheme using standard protein purification techniques. In another embodiment, Pep 133-related peptides are produced by recombinant DNA techniques. Alternative to recombinant expression, a Pep 133-related peptide or polypeptide can be 5 synthesized chemically using standard peptide synthesis techniques
Typically, biologically active portions comprise a domain or motif with at least one activity of a Pep 133-related peptide. In a preferred embodiment, a Pep 133-related peptide comprises a Pepl33- related-target binding region, a dibasic cleavage site, an amidation site, or a signal sequence.
A biologically active Pep 133-related peptide may, for example, comprise at least 1, 2, 3, or 5 10 amino acid changes from the sequence of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8, or may encode a biologically active Pep 133-related peptide comprising at least 1%, 2%, 3%, 5%, 8%, 10% or 15% changes in amino acids from the sequence of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8. • In other embodiments, the Pep 133 -related peptide is substantially homologous to the i' i , sequences .of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8, and retains the; functional activity of the Pep 133-related peptide, • ,.15 i yet differs in amino acid sequence due to natural allelic variation or mutagenesis, as described . . further herein. Accordingly, in another embodiment, the Pep 133-related peptide is a protein which Comprises an amino acid sequence which shares more than about 60% but less than 100% homology with the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8 and retains the functional activity of the Pep 133-related peptides of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8. Preferably, the protein is at least about 30%, 40%, 20 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 92%, 95%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 99.8% homologous to SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8, but is not identical to SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8. Preferably the Pep 133-related peptide is less than identical (e.g. 100%, identity) to a naturally occurring Pepl33-related peptides. Percent homology can be determined as further detailed above.
25 Pepl 33-related nucleic acids
The human Pepl33 gene is localized at chromosome lp35. One aspect of the invention pertains to purified or isolated nucleic acid molecules that encode Pep 133-related peptides or biologically active portions thereof as further described herein, as well as nucleic acid fragments thereof. Another aspect of the invention includes Pep 133-related nucleic acid sequences comprising 30 one or more splice sites or microsatellite sequences. Said nucleic acids may be used for example in therapeutic and diagnostic methods and in drug screening assays as further described herein.
An object of the invention is a purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid coding for a Pep 133-related peptide, complementary sequences thereto, and fragments thereof. The invention also pertains to a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide having at least 95% 35 nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide coding for a Pep 133-related peptide, advantageously 99 % nucleotide identity, preferably 99.5% nucleotide identity and most preferably 99.8% nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide coding for a Pep 133-related peptide, or a sequence complementary thereto or a biologically active fragment thereof. Another object of the invention relates to purified, isolated or recombinant nucleic acids comprising a polynucleotide that hybridizes, under the stringent 5 hybridization conditions defined herein, with a polynucleotide coding for a Pep 133-related peptide, or a sequence complementary thereto or a variant thereof or a biologically active fragment thereof.
In another preferred aspect, the invention pertains to purified or isolated nucleic acid molecules that encode a portion or variant of a Pep 133-related peptide, wherein the portion or variant displays a Pep 133-related activity of the invention. Preferably said portion or variant is of a 10 naturally occurring Pep 133 -related peptide
Another object of the invention is a purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid encoding a Pep 133-related peptide comprising, consisting essentially of, or consisting of the amino acid „ sequence of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8, or fragments thereof, wherein the isolated nucleic acid molecule , , , ■„ encodes one or more Pep 133,-related . peptide motifs. .For example, the purified, isolated or • . .. x ■ 15 , recombinant nucleic acid may comprise a genomic DNA or fragment thereof which encodes the . polypeptide of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8 or a fragment thereof. Any combination of said motifs may also be specified.
The nucleotide sequence determined from the cloning of the Pep 133 gene allows for the generation of probes and primers designed for use in identifying and/or cloning other Pep 133-related 20 peptides family members (e.g. sharing the novel functional domains), as well as Pep 133 -related peptides homologues from other species.
A nucleic acid fragment encoding a "biologically active portion of a Pep 133-related peptide" can be prepared by isolating a portion of a nucleotide sequence coding for a Pep 133-related peptide, which encodes a polypeptide having a Pep 133-related peptides biological activity, expressing the 25 encoded portion of the Pep 133-related peptide (e.g., by recombinant expression in vitro or in vivo) and assessing the activity of the encoded portion of the Pep 133 -related peptide.
The invention further encompasses nucleic acid molecules that differ from the Pepl33- related nucleotide sequences of the invention due to degeneracy of the genetic code and encode the same Pep 133-related peptides and fragment of the invention. 30 In addition to the Pep 133-related nucleotide sequences described above, it will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that DNA sequence polymorphisms that lead to changes in the amino acid sequences of the Pep 133-related peptides may exist within a population (e.g., the human population). Such genetic polymorphism may exist among individuals within a population due to natural allelic variation. Such natural allelic variations can typically result in 1-5% variance in the 35 nucleotide sequence of the Pepl33 gene or nucleic acid sequence encoding Pep 133-related peptide. Nucleic acid molecules corresponding to natural allelic variants and homologues of the Pep 133 -related nucleic acids of the invention can be isolated based on their homology to the Pep 133- related nucleic acids disclosed herein using the cDNAs disclosed herein, or a portion thereof, as a hybridization probe according to standard hybridization techniques under stringent hybridization 5 conditions.
It will be appreciated that the invention comprises polypeptides having an amino acid sequence encoded by any of the polynucleotides of the invention.
Uses of Pep 133-related nucleic acids
10 Polynucleotide sequences (or the complements thereof) encoding Pep 133-related peptides have various applications, including uses as hybridization probes, in chromosome and gene mapping, and in the generation of antisense RNA and DNA. In addition, Pep 133-related peptides-encoding nucleic acids are useful as targets for pharmaceutical intervention, e.g. for the development of DNA -, . '- .vaccines,. and for the preparation of Pep 133-related peptides by recombinant techniques, as described
',15 .' .-, herein: The polynucleotides described-herein, including sequence variants thereof,' can be used in diagnostic assays. Accordingly, diagnostic methods based on detecting the presence of such - polynucleotides in body fluids or tissue samples are a feature of the present invention. Examples of nucleic acid based diagnostic assays in accordance with the present invention include, but are not limited to, hybridization assays, e.g., in situ hybridization, and PCR-based assays. Polynucleotides,
20 including extended length polynucleotides, sequence variants and fragments thereof, as described herein, may be used to generate hybridization probes or PCR primers for use in such assays. Such probes and primers will be capable of detecting polynucleotide sequences, including genomic sequences that are similar, or complementary to, the Pep 133-related peptides polynucleotides described herein.
25 The invention includes primer pairs for carrying out a PCR to amplify a segment of a polynucleotide of the invention. Each primer of a pair is an oligonucleotide having a length of between 15 and 30 nucleotides such that i) one primer of the pair forms a perfectly matched duplex with one strand of a polynucleotide of the invention and the other primer of the pair form a perfectly match duplex with the complementary strand of the same polynucleotide, and ii) the primers of a pair
30 form such perfectly matched duplexes at sites on the polynucleotide that separated by a distance of between 10 and 2500 nucleotides. Preferably, the annealing temperature of each primer of a pair to its respective complementary sequence is substantially the same.
Hybridization probes derived from polynucleotides of the invention can be used, for example, in performing in situ hybridization on tissue samples, such as fixed or frozen tissue sections
35 prepared on microscopic slides or suspended cells. Briefly, a labeled DNA or RNA probe is allowed to bind its DNA or RNA target sample in the tissue section on a prepared microscopic, under controlled conditions. Generally, dsDNA probes consisting of the DNA of interest cloned into a plasmid or bacteriophage DNA vector are used for this purpose, although ssDNA or ssRNA probes may also be used Probes are generally oligonucleotides between about 15 and 40 nucleotides in length Alternatively, the probes can be polynucleotide probes generated by PCR random priming primer extension or in vitro transcription of RNA from plasmids (riboprobes). These latter probes are typically several hundred base pairs in length The probes can be labeled by any of a number of label groups and the particular detection method will correspond to the type of label utilized on the probe (e.g., autoradiography, X-ray detection, fluorescent or visual microscopic analysis, as appropriate). The reaction can be further amplified in situ using immunocytochemical techniques directed against the label of the detector molecule used, such antibodies directed to a fluorescein moiety present on a fluorescently labeled probe, or against avidin, or marker enzymes (peroxidase, •, alkaline phosphatase) Specific labelling and in situ detection methods can be found, for example, in v ;Howard, G. C, Ed , Methods m Nonradi active Detection, Appleton & Lange, Norwalk, Conn., >• . (1993). , . , ... . . . . „• . ' . - •» . - . . .. - *- ■ -. . : -. ...
Hybridization probes and PCR primers may also be selected from the genomic sequences corresponding to the full-length proteins identified in accordance with the present invention, including promoter, enhancer elements and introns of the gene encoding the naturally occurring polypeptide. Nucleotide sequences encoding a Pep 133-related peptide can also be used to construct hybridization probes for mapping the gene which encodes Pep 133-related peptides and for the genetic analysis of individuals. The nucleotide sequences provided herein may be mapped to a chromosome and specific regions of a chromosome using known techniques, such as in situ hybridization, linkage analysis against known chromosomal markers, and hybridization screening with libraries. Briefly, sequences can be mapped to chromosomes by preparing PCR primers (preferably 15-25 bp) from the Pep 133-related peptides cDNA. Computer analysis of the 3' untranslated region is used to rapidly select primers that do not span more than one exon in the genomic DNA, which would complicate the amplification process. Individuals carrying variations of, or mutations in the gene encoding a Pep 133-related peptide of the present invention may be detected at the DNA level by a variety of techniques. Nucleic acids used for diagnosis may be obtained from a patient's cells, including, for example, tissue biopsy and autopsy material. Genomic DNA may be used directly for detection or may be amplified enzymatically by using PCR (Saiki, et al. Nature 324: 163-166 (1986)) prior to analysis. RNA or cDNA may also be used for the same purpose. As an example, PCR primers complementary to the nucleic acid of the present invention can be used to identify and analyze mutations in the gene of the present invention. Deletions and insertions can be detected by a change in size of the amplified product in comparison to the normal genotype. Point mutations can be identified by hybridizing amplified DNA to radiolabeled RNA of the invention or alternatively, radiolabeled antisense DNA sequences of the invention. Sequence changes at specific locations may also be revealed by nuclease protection assays, such RNase and SI protection or the chemical cleavage method (e.g. Cotton, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85 4397- 4401 (1985)), or by differences in melting temperatures. "Molecular beacons" (Kostrikis L. G. et al , Science 279:1228-1229 (1998)), hairpin-shaped, single-stranded synthetic oligonucleotides containing probe sequences which are complementary to the nucleic acid of the present invention, may also be used to detect point mutations or other sequence changes as well as monitor expression levels of Pep 133 -related peptides.
10
Oligonucleotide and Antisense Compounds.
Oligonucleotides of the invention, including PCR primers and antisense compounds, are •• ' synthesized by conventional means on a commercially available automated DNA synthesizer, e.g. an
• " "" Applied Biosystems (Foster City, CA) model 380B, 392 or 394 DNA/RNA synthesizer, or like .
15 .- instrument. -Preferably, phosphoramidite chemistry is employed, e.g. as disclosed in the following references. Beaucage and Iyer, Tetrahedron, 48: 2223-231 1 (1992); Molko et al, U S. patent 4,980,460; Koster et al, U.S. patent 4,725,677; Caruthers et al, U.S. patents 4,415,732; 4,458,066; and 4,973,679. For therapeutic use, nuclease resistant backbones are preferred. Many types of modified oligonucleotides are available that confer nuclease resistance, e.g. phosphorothioate,
20 phosphorodithioate, or phosphoramidate. For references see, e.g. phosphorothioates: Stec et al, U.S. patent 5,151,510; Hirschbein, U.S. patent 5, 166,387; Bergot, U.S. patent 5,183,885; phosphoramidates' Froehler et al, PCT/US 90/03138; and for a review of additional applicable chemistries' Uhlmann and Peyman (cited above). The length of the antisense oligonucleotides has to be sufficiently large to ensure that specific binding will take place only at the desired target
25 polynucleotide and not at other fortuitous sites. The upper range of the length is determined by several factors, including the inconvenience and expense of synthesizing and purifying oligomers greater than about 30-40 nucleotides in length, the greater tolerance of longer oligonucleotides for mismatches than shorter oligonucleotides, and the like. Preferably, the antisense oligonucleotides of the invention have lengths in the range of about 15 to 40 nucleotides. More preferably, the
30 oligonucleotide moieties have lengths in the range of about 18 to 25 nucleotides.
Primers and probes
Primers and probes of the invention can be prepared by any suitable method, including, for example, cloning and restriction of appropriate sequences and direct chemical synthesis by a method 35 such as the phosphodiester method of Narang SA et al (Methods Enzymol 1979;68:90-98), the phosphodiester method of Brown EL et al (Methods Enzymol 1979;68 109-151), the diethylphosphoramidite method of Beaucage et al (Tetrahedron Lett 1981, 22- 1859-1862) and the solid support method described in EP 0 707 592.
Detection probes are generally nucleic acid sequences or uncharged nucleic acid analogs such as, for example peptide nucleic acids which are disclosed in WO 92/20702, morpholino analogs which are described in U.S. Patents 5,185,444, 5,034,506 and 5, 142,047. If desired, the probe may be rendered "non-extendable" in that additional dNTPs cannot be added to the probe In and of themselves analogs usually are non-extendable and nucleic acid probes can be rendered non- extendable by modifying the 3' end of the probe such that the hydroxyl group is no longer capable of participating in elongation. For example, the 3' end of the probe can be functionalized with the capture or detection label to thereby consume or otherwise block the hydroxyl group.
Any of the polynucleotides of the present invention can be labeled, if desired, by incorporating any label group known in the art to be detectable by spectroscopic, photochemical, biochemical, '10 immunochemical, or chemical means. Additional examples include non-radioactive labelling of ; - ., nucleic acid fragments as described in Urdea et al .(Nucleic Acids. Research 1 L4937-4957, 1988)-or ., Sanchez-Pescador et al. (J. Clin. Microbiol. 26(10).1934-1938, 1988). In addition, the probes according to the present invention may have structural characteristics such that they allow the signal amplification, such structural characteristics being, for example, branched DNA probes as those described by Urdea et al (Nucleic Acids Symp. Ser. 24:197-200, 1991) or in the European patent No. EP 0225807 (Chiron).
A label can also be used to capture the primer, so as to facilitate the immobilization of either the primer or a primer extension product, such as amplified DNA, on a solid support. A capture label is attached to the primers or probes and can be a specific binding member which forms a binding pair with the solid's phase reagent's specific binding member (e.g. biotin and streptavidin). Therefore depending upon the type of label carried by a polynucleotide or a probe, it may be employed to capture or to detect the target DNA. Further, it will be understood that the polynucleotides, primers or probes provided herein, may, themselves, serve as the capture label For example, in the case where a solid phase reagent's binding member is a nucleic acid sequence, it may be selected such that it binds a complementary portion of a primer or probe to thereby immobilize the primer or probe to the solid phase In cases where a polynucleotide probe itself serves as the binding member, those skilled in the art will recognize that the probe will contain a sequence or "tail" that is not complementary to the target. In the case where a polynucleotide primer itself serves as the capture label, at least a portion of the primer will be free to hybridize with a nucleic acid on a solid phase. DNA labelling techniques are well known to the skilled technician. The probes of the present invention are useful for a number of purposes. They can be notably used in Southern hybridization to genomic DNA The probes can also be used to detect PCR amplification products. They may also be used to detect mismatches in Pepl33-encoding genes or mRNA using other techniques.
Any of the nucleic acids, polynucleotides, primers and probes of the present invention can be 5 conveniently immobilized on a solid support. Solid supports are known to those skilled in the art and include the walls of wells of a reaction tray, test tubes, polystyrene beads, magnetic beads, nitrocellulose strips, membranes, microparticles such as latex particles, sheep (or other animal) red blood cells, duracytes and others The solid support is not critical and can be selected by one skilled in the art. Thus, latex particles, microparticles, magnetic or non-magnetic beads, membranes, plastic
10 tubes, walls of microtiter wells, glass or silicon chips, sheep (or other suitable animal's) red blood cells and duracytes are all suitable examples. Suitable methods for immobilizing nucleic acids on solid phases include ionic, hydrophobic, covalent interactions and the like. A solid support, as used herein, refers to any material which is insoluble, or can be made insoluble by a subsequent reaction.
' ;: -"^' he-solid support can be chosen for its intrinsic ability to attract and imm'obilize'the capture reagent.
• 15- - Alternatively, the solid phase can- retain an additional receptor which has the ability to attract and • immobilize the capture reagent. The additional receptor can include a charged substance that is oppositely charged with respect to the capture reagent itself or to a charged substance conjugated to the capture reagent. As yet another alternative, the receptor molecule can be any specific binding member attached to the solid support and which has the ability to immobilize the capture reagent
20 through a specific binding reaction. The receptor molecule enables the indirect binding of the capture reagent to a solid support material before the performance of the assay or during the performance of the assay. The solid phase thus can be a plastic, derivatized plastic, magnetic or non-magnetic metal, glass or silicon surface of a test tube, microtiter well, sheet, bead, microparticle, chip, sheep (or other suitable animal's) red blood cells, duracytes and other configurations known to
25 those of ordinary skill in the art. The nucleic acids, polynucleotides, primers and probes of the invention can be attached to or immobilized on a solid support individually or in groups of at least 2, 5, 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, or 25 distinct polynucleotides of the invention to a single solid support. In addition, polynucleotides other than those of the invention may be attached to the same solid support as one or more polynucleotides of the invention.
30 Any polynucleotide provided herein may be attached in overlapping areas or at random locations on a solid support. Alternatively the polynucleotides of the invention may be attached in an ordered array wherein each polynucleotide is attached to a distinct region of the solid support which does not overlap with the attachment site of any other polynucleotide. Preferably, such an ordered array of polynucleotides is designed to be "addressable" where the distinct locations are recorded and
35 can be accessed as part of an assay procedure. Addressable polynucleotide arrays typically comprise a plurality of different oligonucleotide probes that are coupled to a surface of a substrate in different known locations. The knowledge of the precise location of each polynucleotides location makes these "addressable" arrays particularly useful in hybridization assays. Any addressable array technology known in the art can be employed with the polynucleotides of the invention. One particular embodiment of these polynucleotide arrays is known as the Genechips, and has been generally described in US Patent 5,143,854; PCT publications WO 90/15070 and 92/10092
Methods for obtaining variant nucleic acids and polypeptides
In addition to naturally-occurring allelic variants of the Pep 133-related peptides sequences that may exist in the population, the skilled artisan will appreciate that changes can be introduced by mutation into the nucleotide sequences coding for Pep 133-related peptides, thereby leading to changes in the amino acid sequence of the encoded Pep 133-related peptides, with or without altering the functional ability of the Pep 133-related peptides. ' ' ' • ■ ' - Several types of variants are contemplated including 1) one in which one or more of the amino acid residues are substituted with a conserved or non-conserved amino acid residue" and such substituted amino acid residue may or may not be one encoded by the genetic code, or 2) one in which one or more of the amino acid residues includes a substitiient group, or 3) one in which the mutated Pep 133-related peptide is fused with another compound, such as a compound to increase the half-life of the polypeptide (for example, polyethylene glycol), or 4) one in which the additional amino acids are fused to the mutated Pep 133-related peptide, such as a leader or signal-anchor sequence or a sequence which is employed for purification of the mutated Pep 133-related peptide or a preprotein sequence. Such variants are deemed to be within the scope of those skilled in the art.
For example, nucleotide substitutions leading to amino acid substitutions can be made in the sequences that do not substantially change the biological activity of the protein. An amino acid residue-can be altered from the wild-type sequence encoding a Pep 133-related peptide, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof without altering the biological activity. In general, amino acid residues that are conserved among the Pep 133-related peptides of the present invention; are predicted to be less amenable to alteration.
In one aspect, the invention pertains to nucleic acid molecules encoding Pep 133-related peptides, or biologically active fragments or homologues thereof that contain changes in amino acid residues that are not essential for activity. Such Pep 133-related peptides differ in amino acid sequence from SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8 yet retain biological activity In one embodiment, the isolated nucleic acid molecule comprises a nucleotide sequence encoding a protein, wherein the protein comprises an amino acid sequence at least about 60% homologous to an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8. Preferably, the protein encoded by the nucleic acid molecule is at least about 65-70% homologous to an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8, more preferably sharing at least about 75-80% identity with an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8, even more preferably sharing at least about 85%, 90%, 92%, 95%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 99.8% identity with an 5 amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8.
In another aspect, the invention pertains to nucleic acid molecules encoding Pep 133-related peptides that contain changes in amino acid residues that result in increased biological activity, or a modified biological activity. In another aspect, the invention pertains to nucleic acid molecules encoding Pep 133-related peptides that contain changes in amino acid residues that are essential for a
10 Pep 133 -related activity. Such Pep 133-related peptides differ in amino acid sequence from SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8 and display reduced activity, or essentially lack one or more Pep 133 -related peptides biological activities. Mutations can be introduced into any of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8, by standard techniques, such as site-directed mutagenesis and PCR-mediated mutagenesis. For example,
-■ - " conservative amino acid substitutions may be made at one or more predicted non-essential amino
15 f acid residues A "conservative amino acid substitution" is one in which the amino acid residue is replaced with an amino acid residue having a similar side chain. Families of amino acid residues having similar side chains have been defined in the art These families include amino acids with basic side chains (e.g., lysine, arginine, histidine), acidic side chains (e.g., aspartic acid, glutamic acid), uncharged polar side chains (e.g., glycine, asparagine, glutamine, serine, threonine, tyrosine,
20 cysteine), nonpolar side chains (e g., alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, proline, phenylalanine, methionine, tryptophan), beta-branched side chains (e.g., threonine, valine, isoleucine) and aromatic side chains (e.g., tyrosine, phenylalanine, tryptophan, histidine) Thus, a predicted nonessential amino acid residue in a Pep 133-related peptide, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof may be replaced with another amino acid residue from the same side chain family.
25 Alternatively, in another embodiment, mutations can be introduced randomly along all or part of a Pep 133-related peptides coding sequence, such as by saturation mutagenesis, and the resultant mutants can be screened for Pep 133-related peptides biological activity to identify mutants that retain activity. Following mutagenesis of one of SEQ ID NOS 3 to 8, the encoded protein can be expressed recombinantly and the activity of the protein can be determined.
30 The invention also provides Pep 133-related chimeric or fusion proteins. As used herein, a
Pep 133-related "chimeric protein" or "fusion protein" comprises a Pep 133-related peptide of the invention or fragment thereof, operatively linked, preferably fused in frame, to a non-Pep 133-related peptide In a preferred embodiment, a Pep 133-related fusion protein comprises at least one biologically active portion of a Pep 133-related peptide In another preferred embodiment, a Pep 133-
35 related fusion protein comprises at least two biologically active portions of a Pep 133-related peptide. For example, in one embodiment, the fusion protein is a GST-Pep 133-related fusion protein in which a Pep 133-related domain sequences are fused to the C-terminus of the GST sequences. Such fusion proteins can facilitate the purification of recombinant Pep 133-related peptides. In another embodiment, the fusion protein is a Pep 133-related peptide containing a heterologous signal sequence 5 at its N-terminus, such as for example to allow for a desired cellular localization in a certain host cell.
The Pep 133-related fusion proteins of the invention can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions and administered to a subject in vivo Moreover, the Pep 133-related fusion proteins of the invention can be used as immunogens to produce anti-Pep 133-related antibodies in a subject, to
10 purify Pep 133-related peptides ligands and in screening assays to identify molecules which inhibit the interaction of Pep 133-related peptides polpeptide with a Pep 133 -related target molecule.
Furthermore, isolated peptidyl portions of the subject Pep 133-related peptides can also be obtained by screening peptides recombinantly- produced from the corresponding fragment of the :!."• , nucleic acid encoding such peptides. In addition, fragments can be chemically synthesized' using
'.15 s techniques known in the art such as conventional Merrifield. solid phase f-Moc or t-Boc chemistry. ■ ■. ■• For example, a Pep 133-related peptide of the present invention may be arbitrarily divided into fragments of desired length with no overlap of the fragments, or preferably divided into overlapping fragments of a desired length. The fragments can be produced (recombinantly or by chemical synthesis) and tested to identify those peptidyl fragments which can function as either agonists or
20 antagonists of a Pep 133-related activity (e.g., by microinjection or in vitro protein binding assays). In an illustrative embodiment, peptidyl portions of a Pep 133-related peptide, such as a Pep 133- related target binding region, can be tested for Pepl33-related activity by expression as thioredoxin fusion proteins, each of which contains a discrete fragment of the Pep 133-related peptide (U.S. Patents 5, 270, 181 and 5,292,646 and W094/02502).
25 The present invention also pertains to variants of the Pep 133-related peptides which function as either agonists or antagonists of Pep 133-related peptides. Variants of the Pep 133-related peptides can be generated by mutagenesis, e.g., discrete point mutation or truncation of a Pep 133-related peptide. An agonist of a Pep 133-related peptide can retain substantially the same, or a subset, of the biological activities of the naturally occurring form of a Pep 133-related peptide An antagonist of a
30 Pep 133-related peptide can inhibit one or more of the activities of the naturally occurring form of the Pep 133-related peptide by, for example, competitively inhibiting the association of Pep 133-related peptide with a Pep 133-related target molecule. Thus, specific biological effects can be elicited by treatment with a variant of limited function. In one embodiment, variants of a Pep 133-related peptide which function as either Pep 133-related peptides agonists (mimetics) or as Pep 133-related peptides
35 antagonists can be identified by screening combinatorial libraries of mutants, e.g , truncation mutants, of a Pep 133-related peptide for Pep 133-related peptide agonist or antagonist activity. In one embodiment, a variegated library of Pep 133-related peptides variants is generated by combinatorial mutagenesis at the nucleic acid level and is encoded by a variegated gene library. A variegated library of Pep 133-related peptides variants can be produced by, for example, 5 enzymatically ligating a mixture of synthetic oligonucleotides into gene sequences such that a degenerate set of potential Pep 133-related peptides sequences is expressible as individual polypeptides, or alternatively, as a set of larger fusion proteins (e.g., for phage display) containing the set of Pep 133-related peptides sequences therein. There are a variety of methods which can be used to produce libraries of potential Pep 133-related peptides variants from a degenerate
10 oligonucleotide sequence. Chemical synthesis of a degenerate gene sequence can be performed in an automatic DNA synthesizer, and the synthetic gene then ligated into an appropriate expression vector. Use of a degenerate set of genes allows for the provision, in one mixture, of all of the . sequences encoding the desired set of potential Pep 133 -related peptides sequences . :'.'--.'. ■ X---: x ' i .In addition, libraries of fragments of a Pep.l33-related peptide coding sequence can be used : 15 ' -. , to generate a variegated population of Pep 133-related peptides. fragments for screening and ' :.- subsequent selection of variants of a Pep 133-related peptide. In one embodiment, a library of coding sequence fragments can be generated by treating a double stranded PCR fragment of Pep 133-related peptides coding sequence with a nuclease under conditions wherein nicking occurs only about once per. molecule, denaturing the double stranded DNA, renaturing the DNA to form double stranded
20 DNA which can include sense/antisense pairs from different nicked products, removing single stranded portions from reformed duplexes by treatment with S 1 nuclease, and ligating the resulting fragment library into an expression vector. By this method, an expression library can be derived which encodes N-terminal, C-terminal and internal fragments of various sizes of the Pep 133-related peptide.
25 Modified Pep 133-related peptides can be used for such purposes as enhancing therapeutic or prophylactic efficacy, or stability (e.g., ex vivo shelf life and resistance to proteolytic degradation in vivo). Such modified peptides, when designed to retain at least one activity of the naturally occurring form of the protein, are considered functional equivalents of the Pep 133-related peptide described in more detail herein. Such modified peptide can be produced, for instance, by amino acid substitution,
30 deletion, or addition.
Whether a change in die amino acid sequence of a peptide results in a functional Pep 133- related peptides homologue can be readily determined by assessing a Pep 133-related peptide biological activity of the variant peptide. Peptides in which more than one replacement has taken place can readily be tested in the same manner.
35 This invention further contemplates a method of generating sets of combinatorial mutants of the presently disclosed Pep 133-related peptides, as well as truncation and fragmentation mutants, and is especially useful for identifying potential variant sequences which differ from a wild-type form by, for example, efficacy, potency and/or intracellular half-life. One purpose for screening such combinatorial libraries is to isolate novel Pep 133-related peptide homologues, which modulate the biological activities of the wild-type protein, or alternatively, possess novel activities all together. For example, mutagenesis can give rise to Pep 133-related peptide homologues which have intracellular half-lives dramatically different than the corresponding wild-type protein The altered protein can be rendered either more stable or less stable to proteolytic degradation or cellular processes which result in destruction or inactivation of a Pep 133-related peptide. Such Pep 133-related peptide homologues. and the genes which encode them, can be utilized to alter the envelope of expression for a particular recombinant Pep 133-related peptides by modulating the half-life of the recombinant protein. For instance, a short half-life can give rise to more transient biological effects associated with a particular recombinant Pep 133-related peptide and, when part of an inducible expression system, can
■ allow tighter control of recombinant protein levels within a cell. As above, such proteins, and < , . • particularly their recombinant nucleic acid constructs, can be used in gene therapy protocols. ,
In an illustrative embodiment of this method, the amino acid sequences for a population of Pep 133-related peptide homologues or other related proteins are aligned, preferably to promote the highest homology possible. Such a population of variants can include, for example, Pep 133-related peptides homologues from one or more species, or Pep 133-related peptides homologues from the same species but which differ due to mutation. Amino acids at each position of the aligned sequences are selected to create a degenerate set of combinatorial sequences. There are many ways by which the library of potential Pep 133-related peptides homologues can be generated from a degenerate oligonucleotide sequence Chemical synthesis of a degenerate gene sequence can be carried out in an automatic DNA synthesizer, and the synthetic genes then be ligated into an appropriate gene for expression. The purpose of a degenerate set of genes is to provide, in one mixture, all of the sequences encoding the desired set of potential Pep 133 -related peptides sequences. The synthesis of degenerate oligonucleotides is well known in the art (Narang, SA (1983) Tetrahedron 393; Itakura et al. (1981) Recombinant DNA, Proc 3rd Cleveland Sympos. Macromolecules, ed. AG Walton, Amsterdam- Elsevier pp. 273-289; Itakura et al. (1984) Annu. Rev Biochem. 53:323; Itakura et al (1984) Science 198: 1056; Ike et al. (1983) Nucleic Acid Res. 11:477. Such techniques have been employed in the directed evolution of other proteins (Scott et al. (1990) Science 249 386-390; Roberts et al. (1992) PNAS 89:2429-2433; Devlin et al. (1990) Science 249: 404-406; Cwirla et al. (1990) PNAS 87: 6378-6382; as well as U.S. Patents Nos: 5, 223,409, 5,198,346, and 5,096,815) Alternatively, other forms of mutagenesis can be utilized to generate a combinatorial library, particularly where no other naturally occurring homologues have yet been sequenced For example, Pep 133-related peptide homologues (both agonist and antagonist forms) can be generated and isolated from a library by screening using, for example, alanine scanning mutagenesis (Ruf et al. (1994) Biochemistry 33: 1565-1572, Wang et al. (1994) J Biol Chem. 269:3095-3099, Balint et al (1993) Gene 137: 109-118; Grodberg et al (1993) Eur. J Biochem. 218:597-601; Nagashima et al (1993) J Biol. Chem. 268:2888-2892; Lowman et al (1991) Biochemistry 30: 10832-10838; and Cunningham et al. ( 1989) Science 244: 1081-1085), by linker scanning mutagenesis (Gustin et al. (1993) Virology 193.653-660, Brown et al. (1992) Mol. Cell Biol. 12:2644 2652; McKnight et al. (1982) Science 232:316); by saturation mutagenesis (Meyers et al. (1986) Science 232:613); by PCR mutagenesis (Leung et al. (1989) Method Cell Mol Biol 1: 1-19); or by random mutagenesis (Miller et al. ( 1992) A Short Course in Bacterial Genetics, CSHL Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY; and Greener et al. (1994) Strategies in Mol Biol 7:32-34).
A wide range of techniques are known in the art for screening gene products of -. combinatorial libraries made by point mutations, as well as for screening cDNA libraries for gene products having a certain property. Such techniques will be generally adaptable for rapid screening ,, of the gene libraries generated by the combinatorial mutagenesis of Pep 133-related peptides. The most widely used techniques for screening large gene libraries typically comprises cloning the gene library into replicable expression vectors, transforming appropriate cells with the resulting library of vectors, and expressing the combinatorial genes under conditions in which detection of a desired activity facilitates relatively easy isolation of the vector encoding the gene whose product was detected.
Each of the illustrative assays described below are amenable to high throughput analysis as necessary to screen large numbers of degenerate Pep 133-related peptides sequences created by combinatorial mutagenesis techniques. In one screening assay, the candidate gene products are displayed on the surface of a cell or viral particle, and the ability of particular cells or viral particles to bind a Pep 133-related target molecule (for example a modified peptide substrate) via this gene product is detected in a "panning assay". For instance, the gene library can be cloned into the gene for a surface membrane protein of a bacterial cell, and the resulting fusion protein detected by panning (Ladner et al., WO 88/06630; Fuchs et al. (1991) BioTechnology 9: 1370-1371, and Goward et al. ( 1992) TIBS 18: 136 140). In a similar fashion, fluorescently labeled Pep 133-related target can be used to score for potentially functional Pep 133-related peptide homologues. Cells can be visually inspected and separated under a fluorescence microscope, or, where the morphology of the cell permits, separated by a fluorescence- activated cell sorter.
In an alternate embodiment, the gene library is expressed as a fusion protein on the surface of a viral particle For instance, in the filamentous phage system, foreign peptide sequences can be expressed on the surface of infectious phage, thereby conferring two significant benefits. As phage can be applied to affinity matrices at very high concentrations, a large number of phage can be screened at one time. Second, since each infectious phage displays the combinatorial gene product on its surface, if a particular phage is recovered from an affinity matrix in low yield, the phage can be amplified by another round of infection. The group of almost identical E. coli filamentous phages 5 Ml 3, fd, and fl are most often used in phage display libraries, as either of the phage gill or gVIII coat proteins can be used to generate fusion proteins without disrupting the ultimate packaging of the viral particle (Ladner et al. PCT publication WO 90/02909; Garrard et al., PCT publication WO 92/09690; Marks et al. (1992) J Biol. Chem. 267: 16007-16010; Griffiths et al. (1993) EMBO J 12:725-734; Clackson et al. (1991) Nature 352:624-628; and Barbas et al. (1992) PNAS 89 4457
10 4461). In an illustrative embodiment, the recombinant phage antibody system (RPAS, Pharmacia Catalog number 27-9400-01) can be easily modified for use in expressing Pep 133-related peptide combinatorial libraries, and the Pep 133-related peptide phage library can be panned on immobilized Pep 133-related target molecule (glutathione immobilized Pep 133-related peptides target-GST fusion
"•■ , .- proteins or immobilized DNA). Successive rounds of phage amplification and panning can greatly
15 .. enrich for Pep 133-related peptide homologues which retain an ability to bind a Pepl33-related target and which can subsequently be screened further for biological activities in automated assays, in order to distinguish between agonists and antagonists.
The invention also provides for identification and reduction to functional minimal size of the Pep 133 -related peptide functional domains to generate mimetics. Thus, such mutagenic techniques as 0 described above are also useful to map the determinants of Pep 133-related peptides, which participate in protein-protein interactions involved in, for example, binding to a Pep 133-related target protein. To illustrate, the critical residues of a Pep 133-related peptide which are involved in molecular recognition of the Pep 133-related target can be determined and used to generate Pepl33- related peptides target- 13P-derived peptidomimetics that competitively inhibit binding of the Pepl33- 5 related peptide to the Pep 133-related peptides target. By employing, for example, scanning mutagenesis to map the amino acid residues of a particular Pep 133-related peptide involved in binding a Pep 133-related peptides target, peptidomimetic compounds can be generated which mimic those residues in binding to a Pep 133-related peptides target, and which, by inhibiting binding of the Pep 133 -related peptide to the Pep 133-related target molecule, can interfere with the function of a 0 Pep 133-related peptide in transcriptional regulation of one or more genes. For instance, non hydrolyzable peptide analogs of such residues can be generated using retro-inverse peptides (e.g., U.S. Patents 5, 1 16,947 and 5,219,089; and Pallai et al. (1983) Int J Pept Protein Res 21:84-92), benzodiazepine (e.g., Freidinger et al. in Peptides: Chemistry and Biology, G.R. Marshall ed., ESCOM Publisher: Leiden, Netherlands, 1988), azepine (e.g., Huffman et al. in Peptides- Chemistry 5 and Biology, G.R. Marshall ed., ESCOM Publisher: Leiden, Netherlands, 1988), substituted gamma lactam rings (Garvey et al. in Peptides: Chemistry and Biology, G.R. Marshall ed., ESCOM Publisher: Leiden, Netherlands, 1988), keto-methylene pseudopeptides (Ewenson et al. (1986) J Med Chem 29 295; and Ewenson et al in Peptides Structure and Function (Proceedings of the 9th American Peptide Symposium) Pierce Chemical Co. Rockland, IL, 1985), P-tum dipeptide cores (Nagai et al (1985) Tetrahedron Left 26:647; and Sato et al. (1986) J Chem Soc Perkin Trans 1 : 123 1), and P-aminoalcohols (Gordon et al. (1985) Biochem Biophys Res Commun 126.419; and Dann et al. (1986) Biochem Biophys Res Commun 134.71).
Chemical Manufacture of Pep 133-related compositions Peptides of the invention are synthesized by standard techniques, e.g. Stewart and Young,
Solid Phase Peptide Synthesis, 2nd Ed. (Pierce Chemical Company, Rockford, IL, 1984). Preferably, a commercial peptide synthesizer is used, e.g. Applied Biosystems, Inc. (Foster City, CA) model 430A, and polypeptides of the invention may be assembled from multiple, separately synthesized and purified, peptide in a convergent synthesis approach,, e.g. Kent et al, U S. patent t , 6, 184,344 and Dawson and Kent, Annu. Rev; Biochem., 69: 923-960 (2000). Peptides of the ,, , invention may be assembled by solid phase synthesis on a cross-linked polystyrene support starting from the carboxyl terminal residue and adding amino acids in a stepwise fashion until the entire peptide has been formed. The following references are guides to the chemistry employed during synthesis: Schnolzer et al, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res., 40: 180-193 (1992); Merrifield, J. Amer. Chem. Soc. Vol. 85, pg. 2149 (1963); Kent et al., pg 185, in Peptides 1984, Ragnarsson, Ed.
(Almquist and Weksell, Stockholm, 1984); Kent et al., pg. 217 in Peptide Chemistry 84, Izumiya, Ed. (Protein Research Foundation, B.H. Osaka, 1985); Merrifield, Science, Vol. 232, pgs 341-347 (1986); Kent, Ann. Rev. Biochem., Vol 57, pgs. 957-989 (1988), and references cited in these latter two references. Preferably, chemical synthesis of polypeptides of the invention is carried out by the assembly of peptide fragments by native chemical ligation, as described by Dawson et al, Science, 266: 776- 779 (1994) and Kent el al, U.S. patent 6, 184,344. Briefly, in the approach a first peptide fragment is provided with an N-terminal cysteine having an unoxidized sulfhydryl side chain, and a second peptide fragment is provided with a C-terminal thioester. The unoxidized sulfhydryl side chain of the N-terminal cysteine is then condensed with the C-terminal thioester to produce an intermediate peptide fragment which links the first and second peptide fragments with a β-aminothioester bond.
The β-aminothioester bond of the intermediate peptide fragment then undergoes an intramolecular rearrangement to produce the peptide fragment product which links the first and second peptide fragments with an amide bond Preferably, the N-terminal cysteines of internal fragments are protected from undesired cyclization and concatenation reactions by a cyclic thiazolidine protecting group as described below Preferably, such cyclic thiazolidme protecting group is a thioprolinyl group.
Peptide fragments having a C -terminal thioester may be produced as described in the following references, which are incoφorated by reference: Kent et al, U.S. patent 6, 184,344; Tam et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 92: 12485-12489 (1995); Blake, Int J. Peptide Protein Res , 17: 273 (1981); Canne et al, Tetrahedron Letters, 36: 1217-1220 (1995); Hackeng et al, Proc Natl. Acad. Sci.. 94 7845-7850 ( 1997); or Hackeng et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci , 96. 10068-10073 (1999) Preferably, the method described by Hackeng et al (1999) is employed. Briefly, peptide fragments are synthesized on a solid phase support (described below) typically on a 0.25 mmol scale by using the in situ neutralization/HBTU activation procedure for Boc chemistry disclosed by Schnolzer et al. Int J. Peptide Protein Res., 40: 180-193 (1992), which reference is incorporated herein by reference. (HBTU is 2-(lH-benzotriazol-l-yl)-l,l,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate and Boc is " tert-butoxycarbonyl). Each synthetic cycle consists of Nα-Boc removal by a 1- to' 2- minute' ' '- treatment with neat TFA, a 1-minute DMF flow wash, a 10- to 20-minute coupling time with 1.0 mmol of preactivated Boc-amino acid in the presence of DIEA, and a second DMF flow wash. (TFA is trifluoroacetic acid, DMF is N,N-dimethylformamide, and DIEA is N,N- diisopropylethylamine). Nα-Boc-amino acids (1.1 mmol) are preactivated for 3 minutes with 1.0 mmol of HBTU (0.5 M in DMF) in the presence of excess DIEA (3 mmol). After each coupling step, yields are determined by measuring residual free amine with a conventional quantitative ninhydrin assay, e.g. as disclosed in Sarin et al, Anal. Biochem., 1 17: 147-157 (1981). After coupling of Gin residues, a DCM flow wash is used before and after deprotection by using TFA, to prevent possible high-temperature (TFA/DMF)-catalyzed pyrrolidone formation. After chain assembly is completed, the peptide fragments are deprotected and cleaved from the resin by treatment with anhydrous HF for 1 hour at 0°C with 4% 7-cresol as a scavenger. The imidazole side-chain 2,4-dinitrophenyl (dnp) protecting groups remain on the His residues because the dnp-removal procedure is incompatible with C-terminal thioester groups. However, dnp is gradually removed by thiols during the ligation reaction After cleavage, peptide fragments are precipitated with ice-cold diethylether, dissolved in aqueous acetonitπle, and lyophilized. Thioester peptide fragments described above are preferably synthesized on a trityl-associated mercaptopropionic acid-leucine (TAMPAL) resin, made as disclosed by Hackeng et al (1999), or comparable protocol. Briefly, N -Boc-Leu (4 mmol) is activated with 3.6 mmol of HBTU in the presence of 6 mmol of DIEA and coupled for 16 minutes to 2 mmol of p-methylbenzhydrylamine (MBHA) resin, or the equivalent Next, 3 mmol of S-trityl mercaptopropionic acid is activated with 2.7 mmol of HBTU in the presence of 6 mmol of DIEA and coupled for 16 minutes to Leu-MBHA resin. The resulting TAMPAL resin can be used as a starting resin for polypeptide-chain assembly after removal of the trityl protecting group with two 1 -minute treatments with 3.5% triisopropylsilane and 2.5% H20 in TFA. The thioester bond can be formed with any desired amino acid by using standard in situ-neutralization peptide coupling protocols for 1 hour, as disclosed in Schnolzer et al (cited above) Treatment of the final peptide fragment with anhydrous HF yields the C-terminal activated mercaptopropionic acid-leucine (MPAL) thioester peptide fragments
Preferably, thiazolidine-protected thioester peptide fragment intermediates are used in native chemical ligation under conditions as described by Hackeng et al (1999), or like conditions. Briefly, 0.1 M phosphate buffer (pH 8.5) containing 6 M guanidine, 4% (vol/vol) benzylmercaptan, and 4% (vol/vol) thiophenol is added to dry peptides to be ligated, to give a final peptide concentration of 1-3 mM at about pH 7, lowered because of the addition of thiols and TFA from the lyophilized peptide Preferably, the ligation reaction is performed in a heating block at 37°C and is periodically vortexed to equilibrate the thiol additives. The reaction may be monitored for degree of completion by ; MALDI-MS or HPLC and electrospray ionizatioh MS ■ '' -' * ■ " < . : ■ ■
After a native chemical ligation reaction is completed or stopped, the N-terminal thiazolidine ring of the product is opened by treatment with a cysteine deprotecting agent, such as O- methylhydroxylamine (0.5 M) at pH 3.5-4.5 for 2 hours at 37° C , after which a 10-fold excess of Tris-(2-carboxyethyl)-phosphine is added to the reaction mixture to completely reduce any oxidizing reaction constituents prior to purification of the product by conventional preparative HPLC
Preferably, fractions containing the ligation product are identified by electrospray MS, are pooled, and lyophilized
After the synthesis is completed and the final product purified, the final polypeptide product may be refolded by conventional techniques, e.g. Creighton, Meth. Enzymol, 107: 305-329 (1984); White, Meth. Enzymol., 1 1 : 481-484 (1967), Wetlaufer, Meth. Enzymol., 107' 301-304 (1984); and the like. Preferably, a final product is refolded by air oxidation by the following, or like: The reduced lyophilized product is dissolved (at about 0.1 mg/mL) in 1 M guanidine hydrochloride (or like chaotropic agent) with 100 mM Tris, 10 mM methionine, at pH 8.6. After gentle overnight stirring, the re-folded product is isolated by reverse phase HPLC with conventional protocols.
Recombinant Expression Vectors and Host Cells
The polynucleotide sequences described herein can be used in recombinant DNA molecules that direct the expression of the corresponding polypeptides in appropriate host cells. Because of the degeneracy in the genetic code, other DNA sequences may encode the equivalent amino acid sequence, and may be used to clone and express the Pep 133-related peptides. Codons preferred by a particular host cell may be selected and substituted into the naturally occurring nucleotide sequences, to increase the rate and/or efficiency of expression. The nucleic acid (e.g., cDNA or genomic DNA) encoding the desired Pep 133-related peptide may be inserted into a replicable vector for cloning (amplification of the DNA), or for expression. The polypeptide can be expressed recombinantly in any of a number of expression systems according to methods known in the art (Ausubel, et al., editors, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1990). Appropriate host cells include yeast, bacteria, archebacteria, fungi, and insect and animal cells, including mammalian cells, for example primary cells, including stem cells, including, but not limited to bone marrow stem cells. More specifically, these include, but are not limited to, microorganisms such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage, plasmid or cosmid DNA expression vectors, and yeast transformed with yeast expression vectors. Also included, are insect cells infected with a recombinant insect virus (such as baculovirus), and mammalian expression systems. The nucleic acid sequence to be expressed may be inserted into the vector by a variety of procedures. In general, DNA is inserted into an appropriate restriction endonuclease site using techniques known in the art. Vector components generally include, but are not limited to, one or more of a signal sequence, an origin of replication, one or more marker genes, an enhancer element, a promoter, and a transcription termination sequence. Construction of suitable vectors containing one or more of these components employs standard ligation techniques known to the skilled artisan.
The Pep 133-related peptides of the present invention are produced by culturing a host cell transformed with an expression vector containing a nucleic acid encoding Pep 133 -related peptides, under the appropriate conditions to induce or cause expression of the protein. The conditions appropriate for Pep 133-related peptide expression will vary with the choice of the expression vector and the host cell, and will be easily ascertained by one skilled in the art through routine experimentation For example, the use of constitutive promoters in the expression vector will require optimizing the growth and proliferation of the host cell, while the use of an inducible promoter requires the appropriate growth conditions for induction. In addition, in some embodiments, the timing of the harvest is important. For example, the baculoviral systems used in insect cell expression are lytic viruses, and thus harvest time selection can be crucial for product yield.
A host cell strain may be chosen for its ability to modulate the expression of the inserted sequences or to process the expressed protein in the desired fashion. Such modifications of the protein include, but are not limited to, acetylation, carboxylation, glycosylation, phosphorylation, lipidation and acylation. Post-translational processing, which cleaves a "prepro" form of the protein, may also be important for correct insertion, folding and/or function. By way of example, host cells such as CHO, HeLa, BHK, MDCK, 293, W138, etc. have specific cellular machinery and characteristic mechanisms for such post-translational activities and may be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the introduced, foreign protein. Of particular interest are Drosophύa melangaster cells, Saccharomyces cerevisiae and other yeasts, E. coli. Bacillus subtilis, SF9 cells, C129 cells, 293 cells, Neurospora, BHK, CHO, COS, and HeLa cells, fibroblasts, Schwanoma cell lines, immortalized mammalian myeloid and lymphoid cell lines, Jukat cells, human 5 cells and other primary cells.
The nucleic acid encoding a Pep 133-related peptide must be "operably linked" by placing it into a functional relationship with another nucleic acid sequence. For example, DNA for a presequence or secretory leader is operably linked to DNA for a polypeptide if it is expressed as a preprotein that participates in the secretion of the polypeptide; a promoter or enhancer is operably
10 linked to a coding sequence if it affects the transcription of the sequence; or a ribosome binding site is operably linked to a coding sequence if it is positioned so as to facilitate translation. Generally, "operably linked" DNA sequences are contiguous, and, in the case of a secretory leader, contiguous
. ., and in reading phase. However, enhancers do not have to be contiguous. Linking is accomplished by ligation at convenient restriction sites. If such. sites do not exist, the synthetic oligonucleotide
- 15 . .adaptors or linkers are used in accordance with conventional practice. Promoter sequences encode either constitutive or inducible promoters. The promoters may be either naturally occurring promoters or hybrid promoters. Hybrid promoters, which combine elements of more than one promoter, are also known in the art, and are useful in the present invention. The expression vector may comprise additional elements, for example, the expression vector may have two replication
20 systems, thus allowing it to be maintained in two organisms, for example in mammalian or insect cells for expression and in a prokaryotic host for cloning and amplification. Both expression and cloning vectors contain a nucleic acid sequence that enables the vector to replicate in one or more selected host cells. Such sequences are well known for a variety of bacteria, yeast, and viruses. The origin of replication from the plasmid pBR322 is suitable for most Gram-negative bacteria, the 2:
25 plasmid origin is suitable for yeast, and various viral origins (SV40, polyoma, adenovirus, VSV or BPV) are useful for cloning vectors in mammalian cells. Further, for integrating expression vectors, the expression vector contains at least one sequence homologous to the host cell genome, and preferably, two homologous sequences which flank the expression construct. The integrating vector may be directed to a specific locus in the host cell by selecting the appropriate homologous sequence
30 for inclusion in the vector. Constructs for integrating vectors are well known in the art.
Preferably, the expression vector contains a selectable marker gene to allow the selection of transformed host cells. Selection genes are well known in the art and will vary with the host cell used. Expression and cloning vectors will typically contain a selection gene, also termed a selectable marker. Typical selection genes encode proteins that (a) confer resistance to antibiotics or other
35 toxins, e.g., ampicillin, neomycin, methotrexate, or tetracycline, (b) complement auxotrophic deficiencies, or (c) supply critical nutrients not available for from complex media, e.g , the gene encoding D-alanine racemase for Bacilli.
Host cells transformed with a nucleotide sequence encoding a Pep 133-related peptide may be cultured under conditions suitable for the expression and recovery of the encoded protein from cell culture The protein produced by a recombinant cell may be secreted, membrane-bound, or contained intracellularly depending on the sequence and/or the vector used. As will be understood by those of skill in the art, expression vectors containing polynucleotides encoding the Pepl 33-related peptides can be designed with signal sequences which direct secretion of the Pep 133-related peptides through a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell membrane. The desired Pep 133-related peptide may be produced recombinantly not only directly, but also as a fusion polypeptide with a heteroiogous polypeptide, which may be a signal sequence or other polypeptide having a specific cleavage site at the N- terminus of the mature protein or polypeptide. In general, the signal sequence may be a component of the vector, or it may be a part of the Pep 133-related peptides-encoding DNA that is inserted into the vector. The signal sequence may be a prokaryotic signal sequence selected, for example, from the ' group of the alkaline phosphatase, penicillinase, lpp, or heat-stable enterotoxin II leaders. For yeast secretion the signal sequence may be, e.g., the yeast invertase leader, alpha factor leader (including Saccharomyces and Kluyveromyces a-factor leaders, the latter described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,010,182), or acid phosphatase leader, the C albicans glucoamylase leader (EP 362,179 published Apr 4, 1990), or the signal described in WO 90113646 published Nov. 15, 1990. In mammalian cell expression, mammalian signal sequences may be used to direct secretion of the protein, such as signal sequences from secreted polypeptides of the same or related species, as well as viral secretory leaders. According to the expression system selected, the coding sequence is inserted into an appropriate vector, which in turn may require the presence of certain characteristic "control elements" or "regulatory sequences " Appropriate constructs are known generally in the art (Ausubel, et al., 1990) and, in many cases, are available from commercial suppliers such as Invitrogen (San Diego, Calif), Stratagene (La Jolla, Calif), Gibco BRL (Rockville, Md.) or Clontech (Palo Alto, Calif )
Expression in Bacterial Systems. Transformation of bacterial cells may be achieved using an inducible promoter such as the hybrid lacZ promoter of the "BLUESCRIPT" Phagemid (Stratagene) or "pSPORTl" (Gibco BRL) In addition, a number of expression vectors may be selected for use in bacterial cells to produce cleavable fusion proteins that can be easily detected and/or purified, including, but not limited to "BLUESCRIPT" (a-galactosidase, Stratagene) or pGEX (glutathione S-transferase; Promega, Madison, Wis.). A suitable bacterial promoter is any nucleic acid sequence capable of binding bacterial RNA polymerase and initiating the downstream (3') transcription of the coding sequence of the Pep 133 gene into mRNA. A bacterial promoter has a transcription initiation region which is usually placed proximal to the 5' end of the coding sequence. This transcription initiation region typically includes an RNA polymerase binding site and a transcription initiation site Sequences encoding metabolic pathway enzymes provide particularly useful promoter sequences. Examples include promoter sequences derived from sugar metabolizing enzymes, such as galactose, lactose and maltose, and sequences derived from biosynthetic enzymes such as tryptophan. Promoters from bacteriophage may also be used and are known in the art. In addition, synthetic promoters and hybrid promoters are also useful; for example, the tat promoter is a hybrid of the trp and lac promoter sequences. Furthermore, a bacterial promoter can include naturally occurring promoters of non- bacterial origin that have the ability to bind bacterial RNA polymerase and initiate transcription An efficient ribosome binding site is also desirable. The expression vector may also include a signal . peptide sequence that provides for secretion of the Pep 133-related peptide in bacteria. The signal , , sequence typically encodes a signal peptide comprised of hydrophobic amino acids, which direct the , secretion of the protein from the cell. The protein is either secreted into the growth media (gram- positive bacteria) or into the periplasmic space, located between the inner and outer membrane of the cell (gram-negative bacteria). The bacterial expression vector may also include a selectable marker gene to allow for the selection of bacterial strains that have been transformed. Suitable selection genes include drug resistance genes such as ampicillin, chloramphenicol, erythromycin, kanamycin, neomycin and tetracycline Selectable markers also include biosynthetic genes, such as those in the histidine, tryptophan and leucine biosynthetic pathways When large quantities of Pep 133-related peptides are needed, e.g., for the induction of antibodies, vectors which direct high level expression of fusion proteins that are readily purified may be desirable. Such vectors include, but are not limited to, multifunctional E. coli cloning and expression vectors such as BLUESCRIPT (Stratagene), in which the Pep 133-related peptide coding sequence may be ligated into the vector in-frame with sequences for the amino-terminal Met and the subsequent 7 residues of beta-galactosidase so that a hybrid protein is produced; PIN vectors (Van Heeke & Schuster JBiol Chem 264:5503-5509 1989); PET vectors ( ovagen, Madison Wis.). Expression vectors for bacteria include the various components set forth above, and are well known in the art. Examples include vectors for Bacillus subtilis, E. coli, Streptococcus cremoris, and Streptococcus liridans. Bacterial expression vectors are transformed into bacterial host cells using techniques well known in the art, such as calcium chloride mediated transfection and electroporation.
Expression in Yeast. Yeast expression systems are well known in the art, and include expression vectors for Saccharomyces cerevisiae, Candida albicans and C. maltosa, Hansenula polymorpha, Kluyrevomyces frag is and K. lactis, Pichia guillerimondn and P pastoris, Schizosaccha-vomyces pombe, and Yawowia hpolytica. Examples of suitable promoters for use in yeast hosts include the promoters for 3-phosphoglycerate kinase (Hitzeman et al., J. Biol Chem. 255:2073 (1980)) or other glycolytic enzymes (Hess et al.,J. Adv. Enzyme Reg. 7: 149 (1968); Holland, Biochemistry 17:4900 (1978)), such as enolase, glyceraldehyde-3- phosphate dehydrogenase, hexokinase, pyruvate decarboxylase, phosphofructokinase, glucose- 6-phosphate isomerase, 3-phosphoglycerate mutase, pyruvate kinase, tri osephosphate isomerase, phosphoglucose isomerase, alpha factor, the ADH2IGAPDH promoter, glucokinase alcohol oxidase, and PGH (Ausubel, et al , 1990, Grant et al., Methods in Enzymology 153 516-544, (1987)). Other yeast promoters, which are inducible have the additional advantage of transcription controlled by growth conditions, include the promoter regions for alcohol dehydrogenase 2, isocytochrome C, acid phosphatase, degradative enzymes associated with nitrogen metabolism, metallothionein, glyceraldehyde-3 -phosphate dehydrogenase, and enzymes responsible for maltose and galactqse utilization. Suitable vectors and promoters for use in yeast expression are further described in EP 73,657. Yeast selectable markers include ADE2. HIS4 LEU2 TRP1 and ALG7, which confers resistance to tunicamycin; the neomycin phosphotransferase gene, which confers resistance to G418, and the CUP1 gene, which allows yeast to grow in the presence of copper ions. Yeast expression vectors can be constructed for intracellular production or secretion of a Pep 133-related peptide from the DNA encoding the Pep 133-related peptides of interest. For example, a selected signal peptide and the appropriate constitutive or inducible promoter may be inserted into suitable restriction sites in the selected plasmid for direct intracellular expression of the Pep 133-related peptide. For secretion of the Pep 133-related peptides, DNA encoding the Pep 133-related peptide can be cloned into the selected plasmid, together with DNA encoding the promoter, the yeast alpha-factor secretory signal/leader sequence, and linker sequences (as needed), for expression of the Pep 133-related peptide. Yeast cells, can then be transformed with the expression plasmids described above, and cultured in an appropriate fermentation media. The protein produced by such transformed yeast can then be concentrated by precipitation with 10% trichloroacetic acid and analyzed following separation by SDS-PAGE and staining of the gels with Coomassie Blue stain. The recombinant Pep 133-related peptides can subsequently be isolated and purified from the fermentation medium by techniques known to those of skill in the art.
Expression in Mammalian Systems.
The Pep 133-related peptides may be expressed in mammalian cells. Mammalian expression systems are known in the art, and include retroviral vector mediated expression systems. Mammalian host cells may be transformed with any of a number of different viral-based expression systems, such as adenovirus, where the coding region can be ligated into an adenovirus transcription/translation complex consisting of the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. Insertion in a nonessential El or E3 region of the viral genome results in a viable virus capable of expression of the polypeptide of interest in infected host cells. A preferred expression vector system is a retroviral vector system such as is generally described in PCT/US97/01019 and PCT/US97/101048. Suitable mammalian expression vectors contain a mammalian promoter which is any DNA sequence capable of binding mammalian RNA polymerase and initiating the downstream (3') transcription of a coding sequence for Pep 133-related peptide into mRNA. A promoter will have a transcription initiating region, which is usually placed proximal to the 5' end of the coding sequence, and a TATA box, using a located 25-30 base pairs upstream of the transcription initiation site. The TATA box is thought to direct RNA polymerase II to begin RNA ' synthesis at the correct site A mammalian promoter will also contain an upstream promoter element : '- (enhancer element), typically located within 100 to 200 base pairs upstream of the TATA box. An ' upstrearn promoter element determines the rate at which transcription is initiated and can act in either orientation. Of particular use as mammalian promoters are the promoters from mammalian viral genes, since the viral genes are often highly expressed and have a broad host range. Examples include promoters obtained from the genomes of viruses such as polyoma virus, fowlpox virus (UK 2,211, 504 published Jul. 5,1989), adenovirus (such as Adenovirus 2), bovine papilloma virus, avian sarcoma virus, cytomegalovirus, a retrovirus, hepatitis-B virus and Simian Virus 40 (SV40), from heteroiogous mammalian promoters, e.g., the actin promoter or an immunoglobulin promoter, and from heat-shock promoters, provided such promoters are compatible with the host cell systems.
Transcription of a DNA encoding a Pep 133-related peptide by higher eukaryotes may be increased by inserting an enhancer sequence into the vector. Enhancers are cis-acting elements of DNA, usually about from 10 to 300 bp, that act on a promoter to increase its transcription. Many enhancer sequences are now known from mammalian genes (globin, elastase, albumin, a-fetoprotein, and insulin) Typically, however, one will use an enhancer from a eukaryotic cell virus. Examples include the SV40 enhancer, the cytomegalovirus early promoter enhancer, the polyoma enhancer on the late side of the replication origin, and adenovirus enhancers. The enhancer is preferably located at a site 5 ' from the promoter. In general, the transcription termination and polyadenylation sequences recognized by mammalian cells are regulatory regions located 3 ' to the translation stop codon and thus, together with the promoter elements, flank the coding sequence. The 3' terminus of the mature mRNA is formed by site-specific post-translational cleavage and polyadenylation. Examples of transcription terminator and polyadenylation signals include those derived from SV40. Long term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins can be effected in a stable expression system. Expression vectors which contain viral origins of replication or endogenous expression elements and a selectable marker gene may be used for this puψose. Appropriate vectors containing selectable markers for use in mammalian cells are readily available commercially and are known to persons skilled in the art Examples of such selectable markers include, but are not limited to heφes 5 simplex virus thymi-dine kinase and adenine phosphoribosyltransferase for use in tk- or hprt-cells, respectively. The methods of introducing exogenous nucleic acid into mammalian hosts, as well as other hosts, is well known in the art, and will vary with the host cell used. Techniques include dextran-mediated transfection, calcium phosphate precipitation, polybrene mediated transfection, protoplast fusion, electroporation, viral infection, encapsulation of the polynucleotide(s) in 10 liposomes, and direct microinjection of the DNA into nuclei
Expression in Insect Cells
Pep 133 -related peptides may also be produced in insect cells, Expression vectors for the . » • ■ transformation of insect cells, and in particular, baculovirus-based expression vectors, are, well
,15. - ' known in the art. In one such system, the Pep 133-related peptides-encoding DNA is fused upstream of an epitope tag contained within a baculovirus expression vector. Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) is used as a vector to express foreign genes in Spodoptera fungiperda Sf9 cells or in Trichoplusia larvae. The Pep 133-related peptides-encoding sequence is cloned into a nonessential region of the virus, such as the polyhedrin gene, and placed under control of the
20 polyhedrin promoter. Successful insertion of a Pep 133-related peptides-encoding sequence will render the polyhedrin gene inactive and produce recombinant virus lacking coat protein coat. The recombinant viruses are then used to infect S. fungiperda cells or Trichoplusia larvae in which the Pep 133 -related peptides is expressed (Smith et al., J. Wol. 46.584 (1994); Engelhard E K et al., Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 91 :3224-3227 (1994)) Suitable epitope tags for fusion to the Pep 133-related
25 peptides-encoding DNA include poly-his tags and immunoglobulin tags (like Fc regions of IgG). A variety of plasmids may be employed, including commercially available plasmids such as pVL1393 (Novagen) Briefly, the Pep 133-related peptides-encoding DNA or the desired portion of the Pepl33- related peptides-encoding DNA is amplified by PCR with primers complementary to the 5' and 3' regions. The 5' primer may incoφorate flanking restriction sites. The PCR product is then digested
30 with the selected restriction enzymes and subcloned into an expression vector. Recombinant baculovirus is generated by co-transfecting the above plasmid and BaculoGoldTM virus DNA (Pharmingen) into Spodoptera fungiperda ("Sf9") cells (ATCC CRL 1711) using lipofectm (commercially available from GIBCO-BRL), or other methods known to those of skill in the art. Virus is produced by day 4-5 of culture in Sf9 cells at 28°C, and used for further amplifications
35 Procedures are performed as further described in O'Reilley et al., BACULOVIRUS EXPRESSION VECTORS: A LABORATORY MANUAL, Oxford University Press (1994). Extracts may be prepared from recombinant virus-infected Sf9 cells as described in Rupert et al , Nature 362: 175-179 (1993). Alternatively, expressed epitope-tagged Pep 133-related peptides can be purified by affinity chromatography, or for example, purification of an IgG tagged (or Fc tagged) Pep 133-related 5 peptide can be performed using chromatography techniques, including Protein A or protein G column chromatography.
Evaluation of Gene Expression.
Gene expression may be evaluated in a sample directly, for example, by standard techniques
10 known to those of skill in the art, e.g., Northern blotting to determine the transcription of mRNA, dot blotting (DNA or RNA), or in situ hybridization, using an appropriately labeled probe, based on the sequences provided herein. Alternatively, antibodies may be used in assays for detection of polypeptides, nucleic acids, such as specific duplexes, including DNA duplexes, RNA duplexes, and
- '' DNA-RNA hybrid duplexes or DNA-protein duplexes. Such antibodies may be labeled and the assay
- 15 carried out where the duplex is bound to a surface, so that upon the formation of duplex on the surface, the presence of antibody bound to the duplex can be detected. Gene expression, alternatively, may be measured by immunohistochemical staining of cells or tissue sections and assay of cell culture or body fluids, to directly evaluate the expression of a Pep 133-related peptide, polypeptide, or polynucleotide. Antibodies useful for such immunological assays may be either
20 monoclonal or polyclonal, and may be prepared against a native sequence Pep 133-related peptide. Protein levels may also be detected by mass spectrometry. A further method of protein detection is with protein chips
Purification of Expressed Protein.
25 Expressed Pep 133-related peptides may be purified or isolated after expression, using any of a variety of methods known to those skilled in the art. The appropriate technique will vary depending upon what other components are present in the sample. Contaminant components that are removed by isolation or purification are materials that would typically interfere with diagnostic or therapeutic uses for the polypeptide, and may include enzymes, hormones, and other solutes. The purification
30 step(s) selected will depend, for example, on the nature of the production process used and the particular Pep 133-related peptide produced. A Pep 133-related peptide or protein may be recovered from culture medium or from host cell lysates. If membrane-bound, it can be released from the membrane using a suitable detergent solution (e.g. Triton-X 100) or by enzymatic cleavage. Alternatively, cells employed in expression of Pep 133-related peptides can be disrupted by various
35 physical or chemical means, such as freeze-thaw cycling, sonication, mechanical disruption, or by use of cell lysing agents. Exemplary purification methods include, but are not limited to, ion- exchange column chromatography; chromatography using silica gel or a cation-exchange resin such as DEAE; gel filtration using, for example, Sephadex G-75; protein A Sepharose columns to remove contaminants such as IgG; chromatography using metal chelating columns to bind epitope-tagged forms of the Pep 133 -related peptide; ethanol precipitation; reverse phase HPLC; chromatofocusing; SDS-PAGE, and ammonium sulfate precipitation. Ordinarily, an isolated Pep 133-related peptide will be prepared by at least one purification step. For example, the Pep 133-related peptide may be purified using a standard anti-Pep 133-related antibody column. Ultrafiltration and dialysis techniques, in conjunction with protein concentration, are also useful (see, for example, Scopes, R , PROTEIN PURIFICATION, Springer-Verlag, New York, N.Y., 1982). The degree of purification necessary will vary depending on the use of the Pep 133-related peptides. In some instances no purification will be necessary. Once expressed and purified as needed, the Pep 133-related peptides and nucleic acids of the present invention are useful in a number of applications, as detailed below
Transgenic animals . . ,■ , ■,
The host cells of the invention can also be used to produce nonhuman transgenic animals. For example, in one embodiment, a host cell of the invention is a fertilized oocyte or an embryonic stem cell into which Pep 133-related peptides-coding sequences have been introduced. Such host cells can then be used to create non-human transgenic animals in which exogenous Pep 133-related peptides sequences have been introduced into their genome or homologous recombinant animals in which endogenous Pep 133-related peptides sequences have been altered. Such animals are useful for studying the function and/or activity of a Pep 133-related peptide or fragment thereof and for identifying and/or evaluating modulators of Pep 133-related activity. As used herein, a "transgenic animal" is a non-human animal, preferably a mammal, more preferably a rodent such as a rat or mouse, in which one or more of the cells of the animal includes a transgene. Other examples of transgenic animals include non-human primates, sheep, dogs, cows, goats, chickens, amphibians, etc. A transgene is exogenous DNA which is integrated into the genome of a cell from which a transgenic animal develops and which remains in the genome of the mature animal, thereby directing the expression of an encoded gene product in one or more cell types or tissues of the transgenic animal As used herein, a "homologous recombinant animal" is a non-human animal, preferably a mammal, more preferably a mouse, in which an endogenous Pep 133 gene has been altered by homologous recombination between the endogenous gene and an exogenous DNA molecule introduced into a cell of the animal, e g , an embryonic cell of the animal, prior to development of the animal.
A transgenic animal of the invention can be created by introducing a Pep 133-related peptides-encoding nucleic acid into the male pronuclei of a fertilized oocyte, e.g., by microinjection or retroviral infection, and allowing the oocyte to develop in a pseudopregnant female foster animal. The Pep 133-related peptides cDNA sequence or a fragment thereof can be introduced as a transgene into the genome of a non-human animal. Alternatively, a nonhuman homologue of a human Pep 133 gene, such as a mouse or rat Pep 133 gene, can be used as a transgene. Intronic sequences and polyadenylation signals can also be included in the transgene to increase the efficiency of expression of the transgene A tissue-specific regulatory sequence(s) can be operably linked to a Pep 133-related peptides transgene to direct expression of a Pep 133-related peptide to particular cells. Methods for generating transgenic animals via embryo manipulation and microinjection, particularly animals such as mice, have become conventional in the art and are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,736,866 and 4,870,009, both by Leder et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,873,191 by Wagner et al. and in Hogan, B., Manipulating the Mouse Embryo, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1986) Similar methods are used for production of other transgenic animals. A transgenic founder animal can be identified based upon the presence of a Pep 133-related peptides transgene in its genome and or expression of Pep 133-related peptides mRNA in tissues or cells of the animals. A transgenic founder animal can then be used to breed additional animals carrying the transgene. Moreover, transgenic animals carrying a transgene encoding a Pep 133-related peptide can further be bred to other transgenic animals carrying other transgenes.
To create an animal in which a desired nucleic acid has been introduced into the genome via homologous recombination, a vector is prepared which contains at least a portion of a Pep 133 gene into which a deletion, addition or substitution has been introduced to thereby alter, e.g., functionally disrupt, the Pep 133 gene. The Pep 133 gene can be a human gene, but more preferably, is a non- human homologue of a human Pep 133 gene (e.g., a cDNA isolated by stringent hybridization with a nucleotide sequence coding for a Pep 133-related peptide). For example, a mouse Pep 133 gene can be used to construct a homologous recombination vector suitable for altering an endogenous gene in the mouse genome. In a preferred embodiment, the vector is designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous Pep 133 gene is functionally disrupted (i.e., no longer encodes a functional protein; also referred to as a "knock out" vector). Alternatively, the vector can be designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous Pep 133 gene is mutated or otherwise altered but still encodes functional protein (e.g., the upstream regulatory region can be altered to thereby alter the expression of the endogenous Pep 133-related peptide). In the homologous recombination vector, the altered portion of the Pep 133-related peptides or gene is flanked at its 5' and 3' ends by additional nucleic acid sequence of the Pep 133 gene to allow for homologous recombination to occur between the exogenous Pep 133 gene carried by the vector and an endogenous Pepl33 gene in an embryonic stem cell. The additional flanking Pep 133-related nucleic acid sequence is of sufficient length for successful homologous recombination with the endogenous gene. Typically, several kilobases of flanking DNA (both at the 5' and 3' ends) are included in the vector (see e.g , Thomas, K. R. and Capecchi, M R. (1987) Cell 51:503 for a description of homologous recombination vectors). The vector is introduced into an embryonic stem cell line (e.g., by electroporation) and cells in which the introduced Pep 133 gene has homologously recombined with the endogenous Pepl33 gene are selected (Li, E. et al. (1992) Cell 69:915, the) The selected cells are then injected into a blastocyst of an animal to form aggregation chimeras (Bradley, A. in Teratocarcinomas and Embryonic Stem Cells. A Practical Approach, E. J. Robertson, ed. (IRL, Oxford, 1987) pp. 113-152). A chimeric embryo can then be implanted into a suitable pseudopregnant female foster animal and the embryo brought to term Progeny harboring the homologously recombined DNA in their germ cells can be used to breed animals in which all cells of the animal contain the homologously recombined DNA by germline transmission of the transgene. Methods for constructing homologous recombination vectors and homologous recombinant animals are described further in Bradley, A. (1991) Current Opinion in Biotechnology 2:823-829 and in WO 90/11354 by Le Mouellec et al.; WO 91/01140 by Smithies et al.; WO 92/0968 by Zijlstra et al.; and WO 93/04169 by Berns et al.
In another embodiment, transgenic non-human animals can be produced which contain selected systems which allow for regulated expression of the transgene-. One example of such a system is the cre/loxP recombinase system of bacteriophage PI. For a description of the cre/loxP recombinase system, see, e g., Lakso et al. (1992) PNAS 89:6232-6236. Another example of a recombinase system is the FLP recombinase system of Saccharomyces cerevisiae (O'Gorman et al (1991) Science 251: 1351-1355). If a cre/loxP recombinase system is used to regulate expression of the transgene, animals containing transgenes encoding both the Cre recombinase and a selected protein are required. Such animals can be provided through the construction of "double" transgenic animals, e.g., by mating two transgenic animals, one containing a transgene encoding a selected protein and the other containing a transgene encoding a recombinase.
Assessing Pepl 33-related peptide activity
It will be appreciated that the invention further provides methods of testing the activity of, or obtaining, functional fragments and variants of Pep 133-related peptides and Pep 133-related nucleotide sequences involving providing a variant or modified Pep 133-related peptides, or Pepl33- related nucleic acid and assessing whether a polypeptide encoded thereby displays a Pep 133-related activity of the invention. Encompassed is thus a method of assessing the function of a Pep 133- related peptides polypeptide comprising: (a) providing a Pep 133-related peptide, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof, and (b) testing said Pep 133-related peptide, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof for a Pep 133-related activity, preferably a Pep 133-related activity. Any suitable format may be used, including cell free, cell-based and in vivo formats. For example, said assay may comprise expressing a Pep 133-related nucleic acid in a host cell, and observing Pep 133-related activity in said cell. In another example, a Pep 133-related peptide, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof is introduced to a cell, and a Pep 133-related 5 activity is observed.
Pep 133-related activities include. (1) antigenicity, or the ability to bind an anti-Pepl33- related peptide specific antibody; (2) immunogenicity, or the ability to generate an anti-Pep 133- related peptide specific antibody; (3) mediating cell proliferation or cell cycle; (4) interacting with a Pep 133-related target molecule, preferably a protein; (5) circulating in human plasma; (6) mediating 10 a Type I IFN-induced anti-cell growth response; (7) mediating a Type I IFN -induced anti- inflammatory response; (8) displaying amidyl modification; and (9) undergoing dibasic cleavage.
Pep 133-related biological activity can be assayed by any suitable method known in the art. . Antigenicity and immunogenicity may be detected, for example, as described in the sections titled '. .' . "Anti Pep 133-related peptide antibodies" and "Uses of Pep 133-related peptide antibodies." . 15' Circulation in blood plasma may be detected as described in "Diagnostic and Prognostic Uses." Interaction with a Pep 133-related peptide target molecule may be detected according to any of the methods described herein, for example, in the section titled "Drug Screening Assays." Amidation may be detected using immunoaffinity techniques with a labeled antibody, as described herein or in Gether, U., et al., Mol Cell Endocrinol 1991; 79:53-63. Detection of dibasic cleavage may be 20 accomplished using known SDS-PAGE or mass spectrometry techniques.
The effect of Pep 133-related peptides on cell growth may be determined using any method known in the art, such as 3H incoφoration or by comparing the number of cells cultured in the presence of a Pep 133-related peptide compared to a negative control.
Assays for detecting antiviral activity include but are not limited to cell fusion assays and the 25 XTT-tetrazolium anti-HIV assay (Lin, et al., Antimicrob Agents Chemother. (1996) 40: 133-8; Gustafson et al., J. Med. Chem. 35, 1978-1986, 1992; Weislow, Journal of the National Cancer Institute, 81(8), 577-586 (1989); and Gulakowski, J Virological Methods, 33, 87-100, (1991)). In addition, in vitro assays that detect Pep 133-related peptide binding to viral envelope target proteins may be designed as exemplified in Gulakowski et al.(1991), supra. These assays detect binding, 30 recognition, or integration of viral particles to host cells and are useful to determine the level of Pep 133-related peptide activity, when compared to a negative control. Any such method may be designed or optimized according to methods common to the art. The results may be confirmed by, for example, ultrafiltration experiments and dot-blot assays. Detecting Pep 133-related peptide activity may also comprise detecting any suitable therapeutic endpoint discussed herein in the section titled 35 "Methods of Treatment". Anti-Pepl 33-related antibodies
The present invention provides antibodies and binding compositions specific for Pepl33- related peptides. Such antibodies and binding compositions include polyclonal antibodies, 5 monoclonal antibodies, Fab and single chain Fv fragments thereof, bispecific antibodies, heteroconjugates, and humanized antibodies Such antibodies and binding compositions may be produced in a variety of ways, including hybπdoma cultures, recombinant expression in bacteria or mammalian cell cultures, and recombinant expression in transgenic animals. There is abundant guidance in the literature for selecting a particular production methodology, e.g. Chadd and
10 Chamow, Curr. Opin. Biotechnol., 12. 188-194 (2001).
The choice of manufacturing methodology depends on several factors including the antibody structure desired, the importance of carbohydrate moieties on the antibodies, ease of culturing and
" - purification, and cost. Many different antibody structures may be generated using standard " expression technology, including full-length antibodies, antibody fragments, such as Fab and Fv
' 15 fragments, as well as chimeric antibodies comprising components from different species. Antibody fragments of small size, such as Fab and Fv fragments, having no effector functions and limited pharmokinetic activity may be generated in a bacterial expression system. Single chain Fv fragments are highly selective for in vivo tumors, show good tumor penetration and low immunogenicity, and are cleared rapidly from the blood, e.g. Freyre et al, J. Biotechnol., 76: 157-163 (2000). Thus, such
20 molecules are desirable for radioimmunodectection and in situ radiotherapy. Whenever pharmacokinetic activity in the form of increased half-life is required for therapeutic puφoses, full- length antibodies are preferable. For example, immunoglobulin G (IgG) the molecule may be one of four subclasses: γl, γ2, γ3, or γ4. If a full-length antibody with effector function is required, then IgG subclasses γl or γ3 are preferred, and IgG subclass γl is most preferred. The γl and γ3
25 subclasses exhibit potent effector function, complement activation, and promote antibody-dependent cell-mediated cytotoxicity through interaction with specific Fc receptors, e.g Raju et al, Glycobiology, 10: 477-486 (2000), Lund et al, J. Immunol., 147: 2657-2662 (1991).
Polyclonal Antibodies. 30 The anti -Pep 133-related antibodies of the present invention may be polyclonal antibodies.
Such polyclonal antibodies can be produced in a mammal, for example, following one or more injections of an immunizing agent, and preferably, an adjuvant. Typically, the immunizing agent and/or adjuvant will be injected into the mammal by a series of subcutaneous or intraperitoneal injections The immunizing agent may include Pep 133-related peptides or a fusion protein thereof. It may be useful to conjugate the antigen to a protein known to be immunogenic in the mammal being immunized. Examples of such immunogenic proteins include, but are not limited to, keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH), serum albumin, bovine thyroglobulin, and soybean trypsin inhibitor. Adjuvants include, for example, Freund's complete adjuvant and MPL-TDM adjuvant (monophosphoryl Lipid A, synthetic trehalose dicoryno-mycolate). The immunization protocol may be determined by one skilled in the art based on standard protocols
Monoclonal Antibodies.
Alternatively, the anti-Pepl 33-related antibodies may be monoclonal antibodies. Monoclonal antibodies may be produced by hybridomas, wherein a mouse, hamster, or other appropriate host animal, is immunized with an immunizing agent to elicit lymphocytes that produce or are capable of producing antibodies that will specifically bind to the immunizing agent, e.g. Kohler and Milstein, Nature 256:495 (1975). Alternatively, the lymphocytes may be immunized in vitro. The immunizing agent will typically include the Pep 133-related peptides or a fusion protein thereof. Generally, spleen cells or lymph node cells are used if non-human mammalian.sources are desired, or peripheral blood lymphocytes ("PBLs") are used if cells of human origin The lymphocytes are fused with an immortalized cell line using a suitable fusing agent, such as polyethylene glycol, to produce a hybridoma cell, e.g. Goding, MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES: PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE, Academic Press, pp. 59-103 (1986); Liddell and Cryer, A Practical Guide to Monoclonal Antibodies (John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1991); Malik and Lillenoj, Editors, Antibody Techniques
(Academic Press. New York, 1994). In general, immortalized cell lines are transformed mammalian cells, for example, myeloma cells of rat, mouse, bovine or human origin. The hybridoma cells are cultured in a suitable culture medium that preferably contains one or more substances that inhibit the growth or survival of unfused, immortalized cells. For example, if the parental cells lack the enzyme hypoxanthine guanine phosphoribosyl transferase (HGPRT), the culture medium for the hybridomas typically will include hypoxanthine, aminopterin, and thymidine (HAT), substances which prevent the growth of HGPRT-deficient cells Preferred immortalized cell lines are those that fuse efficiently, support stable high level production of antibody, and are sensitive to a medium such as HAT medium. More preferred immortalized cell lines are murine or human myeloma lines, which can be obtained, for example, from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC), Rockville, MD. Human myeloma and mouse-human heteromyeloma cell lines also have been described for the production of human monoclonal antibodies, e.g. Kozbor, J. Immunol. 133:3001 (1984); Brodeur et al., Monoclonal Antibody Production Techniques and Applications, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, pp. 51-63 (1987). The culture medium (supernatant) in which the hybridoma cells are cultured can be assayed for the presence of monoclonal antibodies directed against a Pep 133-related peptide. Preferably, the binding specificity of monoclonal antibodies present in the hybridoma supernatant is determined by immunoprecipitation or by an in vitro binding assay, such as radio- immunoassay (RIA) or enzyme- linked immunoabsorbent assay (ELISA). Appropriate techniques and assays are known in the art. 5 The binding affinity of the monoclonal antibody can, for example, be determined by the Scatchard analysis of Munson and Pollard, Anal Biochem. 107:220 (1980). After the desired antibody- producing hybridoma cells are identified, the cells may be cloned by limiting dilution procedures and grown by standard methods [Goding, 1986]. Suitable culture media for this puφose include, for example, Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's Medium and RPMI-1640 medium Alternatively, the
10 hybridoma cells may be grown in vivo as ascites in a mammal. The monoclonal antibodies secreted by selected clones may be isolated or purified from the culture medium or ascites fluid by immunoglobulin purification procedures routinely used by those of skill in the art such as, for ■ • ■ example, protein A-Sepharose, hydroxyl-apatite chromatography, gel electrophoresis, dialysis, or affinity chromatography.' '' -' - , - - . ■ ■ ■ ,
'15 *' s' '• - " The monoclonal antibodies may also be made by recombinant DNA methods, such as those ' described in U.S Pat. No. 4,816,567. DNA encoding the monoclonal antibodies of the invention can be isolated from the Pep 133-related peptides-specific hybridoma cells and sequenced, e.g., by using oligonucleotide probes that are capable of binding specifically to genes encoding the heavy and light chains of murine antibodies. Once isolated, the DNA may be inserted into an expression vector,
20 which is then transfected into host cells such as simian COS cells, Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells, or myeloma cells that do not otherwise produce immunoglobulin protein, to obtain the synthesis of monoclonal antibodies in the recombinant host cells. The DNA also may be modified, for example, by substituting the coding sequence for the human heavy and light chain constant domains for homologous murine sequences (Morrison et al., Proc. Nat Acad. Sci. 81.6851-6855 (1984);
25 Neuberger et al. Nature 312:604-608 (1984); Takeda et al., Nature 314:452-454 (1985)), or by covalently joining to the immunoglobulin coding sequence all or part of the coding sequence for a non-immunoglobulin polypeptide. The non-immunoglobulin polypeptide can be substituted for the constant domains of an antibody of the invention, or can be substituted for the variable domains of one antigen-combining site of an antibody of the invention to create a chimeric bivalent antibody.
30 The antibodies may also be monovalent antibodies. Methods for preparing monovalent antibodies are well known in the art. For example, in vitro methods are suitable for preparing monovalent antibodies. Digestion of antibodies to produce fragments thereof, particularly, Fab fragments, can be accomplished using routine techniques known in the art.
Antibodies and antibody fragments characteristic of hybridomas of the invention can also be
35 produced by recombinant means by extracting messenger RNA, constructing a cDNA library, and selecting clones which encode segments of the antibody molecule. The following are exemplary references disclosing recombinant techniques for producing antibodies: Wall et al., Nucleic Acids Research, Vol. 5, pgs. 3113-3128 (1978); Zakut et al., Nucleic Acids Research, Vol. 8, pgs. 3591- 3601 (1980); Cabilly et al., Proc. Natl Acad. Sci, Vol. 81, pgs. 3273-3277 (1984); Boss et al, Nucleic Acids Research, Vol. 12, pgs 3791-3806 (1984); Amster et al. Nucleic Acids Research, Vol. 8, pgs 2055-2065 (1980); Moore et al, U.S Patent 4,642,334; Skerra et al, Science, Vol. 240, pgs. 1038-1041(1988); Huse et al, Science, Vol. 246, pgs. 1275-1281 (1989), and U.S. patents 6,054,297; 5,530,101; 4,816,567; 5,750, 105; and 5,648,237. In particular, such techniques can be used to produce interspecific monoclonal antibodies, wherein the binding region of one species is combined with non-binding region of the antibody of another species to reduce immunogenicity, e g. Liu et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci, Vol. 84, pgs. 3439-3443 (1987), and patents 6,054,297 and 5,530, 101. Preferably, recombinantly produced Fab and Fv fragments are expressed in bacterial host systems. Preferably, full-length antibodies are produced by mammalian cell culture techniques ' More preferably, full-length antibodies are expressed in Chinese Hampster Ovary (CHO) cells or ' - NSO cells ' < . . - . ' ■ .' - -; -. .. ^ ' ■ . • • . -..- -
Both polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies can be screened by ELISA. As in other solid phase immunoassays, the test is based on the tendency of macromolecules to adsorb nonspecifically to plastic. The irreversibility of this reaction, without loss of immunological activity, allows the formation of antigen-antibody complexes with a simple separation of such complexes from unbound material. To titrate antipeptide serum, peptide conjugated to a carrier different from that used in immunization is adsorbed to the wells of a 96-well microtiter plate. The adsorbed antigen is then allowed to react in the wells with dilutions of anti-peptide serum. Unbound antibody is washed away, and the remaining antigen-antibody complexes are allowed to react with antibody specific for the IgG of the immunized animal, this second antibody is conjugated to an enzyme such as alkaline phosphatase. A visible colored reaction product produced when the enzyme substrate is added indicates which wells have bound antipeptide antibodies. The use of spectrophotometer readings allows better quantification of the amount of peptide-specific antibody bound. High-titer antisera yield a linear titration curve between 10"-> and 10"* dilutions.
Pep 133-related peptide carriers
The invention includes immunogens derived from Pep 133-related peptides and immunogens comprising conjugates between carriers and peptides of the invention. The term immunogen as used herein refers to a substance capable of causing an immune response. The term carrier as used herein refers to any substance which when chemically conjugated to a peptide of the invention permits a host organism immunized with the resulting conjugate to generate antibodies specific for the conjugated peptide. Carriers include red blood cells, bacteriophages, proteins, or synthetic particles such as agarose beads. Preferably, carriers are proteins, such as serum albumin, gamma-globulin, keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH), thyroglobulin, ovalbumin, or fibrinogen 5 The general technique of linking synthetic peptides to a carrier is described in several references, e.g. Walter and Doolittle, "Antibodies Against Synthetic Peptides," in Setlow et al, eds. Genetic Engineering, Vol. 5, pgs. 61-91 (Plenum Press, N.Y, 1983); Green et al. Cell, Vol. 28, pgs. 477-487 (1982); Lerner et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci, Vol 78, pgs. 3403-3407 (1981); Shimizu et al, U.S. Patent 4,474,754; and Ganfield et al, U.S. Patent 4,311,639. Also, techniques employed to 0 link haptens to carriers are essentially the same as the above-referenced techniques, e.g. chapter 20 in Tijsseu Practice and Theory of Enzyme Immunoassays (Elsevier, New York, 1985). The four most commonly used schemes for attaching a peptide to a carrier are (1) glutaraldehyde for amino
"V ■ ■ coupling, e.g. as disclosed by Kagan and Glick, in Jaffe and Behrman, eds. Methods of Hormone - •> Radioimmunoassay, pgs. 328-329 (Academic Press, N Y.;-.1979), and Walter et al. Proc. Natl. 5 Acad. Sci, Vol. 77, pgs. 5197-5200 (1980); (2) water-soluble carbodiimides for carboxyl to amino coupling, e.g. as disclosed by Hoare et al, J. Biol. Chem, Vol. 242, pgs. 2447-2453 (1967); (3) bis-diazobenzidine (DBD) for tyrosine to tyrosine sidechain coupling, e.g. as disclosed by Bassiri et al, pgs. 46-47, in Jaffe and Behrman, eds. (cited above), and Walter et al. (cited above); and (4) maleimidobenzoyl-N-hydroxysuccinimide ester (MBS) for coupling cysteine (or other sulfhydryls) to 0 amino groups, e g. as disclosed by Kitagawa et al, J. Biochem. (Tokyo), Vol. 79, pgs. 233-239 (1976), and Lerner et al. (cited above). A general rule for selecting an appropriate method for coupling a given peptide to a protein carrier can be stated as follows: the group involved in attachment should occur only once in the sequence, preferably at the appropriate end of the segment. For example, BDB should not be used if a tyrosine residue occurs in the main part of a sequence 5 chosen for its potentially antigenic character. Similarly, centrally located lysines rule out the glutaraldehyde method, and the occurrences of aspartic and glutamic acids frequently exclude the carbodiimide approach. On the other hand, suitable residues can be positioned at either end of chosen sequence segment as attachment sites, whether or not they occur in the "native" protein sequence. Internal segments, unlike the amino and carboxy termini, will differ significantly at the 0 "unattached end" from the same sequence as it is found in the native protein where the polypeptide backbone is continuous. The problem can be remedied, to a degree, by acetylating the α-amino group and then attaching the peptide by way of its carboxy terminus. The coupling efficiency to the carrier protein is conveniently measured by using a radioactively labeled peptide, prepared either by using a radioactive amino acid for one step of the synthesis or by labelling the completed peptide by the iodination of a tyrosine residue. The presence of tyrosine in the peptide also allows one to set up a sensitive radioimmune assay, if desirable. Therefore, tyrosine can be introduced as a terminal residue if it is not part of the peptide sequence defined by the native polypeptide.
Peptides can be linked to KLH through cysteines by MBS as disclosed by Liu et al, Biochemistry, Vol. 18, pgs. 690-697 (1979). The peptides are dissolved in phosphate-buffered saline (pH 7.5), 0.1 M sodium borate buffer (pH 9.0) or 1.0 M sodium acetate buffer (pH 4.0). The pH for the dissolution of the peptide is chosen to optimize peptide solubility. The content of free cysteine for soluble peptides is determined by Ellman's method, Ellman, Arch Biochem Biophys, Vol. 82, pg 7077 (1959) For each peptide, 4 mg KLH in 0.25 ml of 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH 7 2) is reacted with 0 7 mg MBS (dissolved in dimethyl formamide) and stirred for 30 min at room temperature. The MBS is added dropwise to ensure that the local concentration of formamide is not too high, as KLH is insoluble in >30% formamide The reaction product, KLH- . - MBS, is then passed through Sephadex G-25 equilibrated with 50 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH . ' 6.0) to remove free MBS, KLH recovery from peak fractions of the column eluate (monitored by . - OD280) is estimated to be approximately 80%. KLH-MBS is then reacted with 5 mg peptide dissolved in I ml of the chosen buffer. The pH is adjusted to 7-7.5 and the reaction is stirred for 3 hr at room temperature. Coupling efficiency is monitored with radioactive peptide by dialysis of a sample of the conjugate against phosphate-buffered saline, and ranged from 8% to 60%. Once the peptide-carrier conjugate is available polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies are produced by standard techniques, e.g. as disclosed by Campbell, Monoclonal Antibody Technology (Elsevier, New York, 1984); Hurrell, ed. Monoclonal Hybridoma Antibodies' Techniques and Applications (CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, 1982); Schreier et al. Hybridoma Techniques (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, New York, 1980); U.S. Patent 4,562,003; and in particular, U.S. Patent 4,562,003.
Humanized Antibodies.
The anti-Pep 133-related antibodies of the invention may further comprise humanized antibodies or human antibodies. The term "humanized antibody" refers to humanized forms of non- human (e.g, murine) antibodies that are chimeric antibodies, immunoglobulin chains or fragments thereof (such as Fv, Fab, Fab', F(ab'), or other antigen-binding partial sequences of antibodies) which contain some portion of the sequence derived from non-human antibody. Humanized antibodies include human immunoglobulins in which residues from a complementary determining region (CDR) of the human immunoglobulin are replaced by residues from a CDR of a non-human species such as mouse, rat or rabbit having the desired binding specificity, affinity and capacity. In general, the humanized antibody will comprise substantially all of at least one, and generally two, variable domains, in which all or substantially all of the CDR regions correspond to those of a non- human immunoglobulin and all or substantially all of the FR regions are those of a human immunoglobulin consensus sequence. The humanized antibody optimally also will comprise at least a portion of an immunoglobulin constant region (Fc), typically that of a human immunoglobulin (Jones et al. Nature 321 :522-525 (1986) and Presta, Curr. Op. Struct. Biol. 2:593-596 (1992)). Methods for humanizing non-human antibodies are well known in the art. Generally, a humanized antibody has one or more amino acids introduced into it from a source which is non-human in order to more closely resemble a human antibody, while still retaining the original binding activity of the antibody. Methods for humanization of antibodies are further detailed in Jones et al , Nature 321 :522-525 (1986); Riechmann et al. Nature 332:323-327 (1988); and Verhoeyen et al. Science 239: 1534- 1536 (1988). Such "humanized" antibodies are chimeric antibodies in that substantially less than an intact human variable domain has been substituted by the corresponding sequence from a non-human species.
Hetewconjugat Antibodies..- , . ; ■ .' - ■ , » . - > > , •, > . -■ .'■„ ' • • , • ■ .• > ' - - • • -.' .- Heteroconjugate antibodies, which comprise two covalently joined antibodies, are also within the scope of the present invention. Heteroconjugate antibodies may be prepared in vitro using known methods in synthetic protein chemistry, including those involving crosslinking agents. For example, immunotoxins may be prepared using a disulfide exchange reaction or by. forming a thioefher bond.
Bispecific Antibodies.
Bispecific antibodies have binding specificities for at least two different antigens. Such antibodies are monoclonal, and preferably human or humanized. One of the binding specificities of a bispecific antibody of the present invention is for a Pep 133-related peptide, and the other one is preferably for a cell-surface protein or receptor or receptor subunit. Methods for making bispecific antibodies are known in the art, and in general, the recombinant production of bispecific antibodies is based on the co-expression of two immunoglobulin heavy-chain/light-chain pairs in hybridoma cells, where the two heavy chains have different specificities, e.g. Milstein and Cuello, Nature 305:537- 539 (1983). Given that the random assortment of immunoglobulin heavy and light chains results in production of potentially ten different antibody molecules by the hybridomas, purification of the correct molecule usually requires some sort of affinity purification, e.g. affinity chromatography.
Uses of Anti-Pepl 33-related antibodies.
Antibodies specific for Pep 133-related peptides may be used as functional antagonists. Preferably, the antagonists of the invention comprise fragments or binding compositions specific for Pep 133-related peptides. Preferably, antagonists of the invention are derived from monoclonal antibodies specific for Pep 133-related peptides. Monoclonal antibodies capable of blocking, or neutralizing, Pep 133 -related peptides are selected by their ability to inhibit Pep 133-related peptides- induced effects.
The use and generation of fragments of antibodies is also well known, e.g. Fab fragments: 5 Tijssen, Practice and Theory of Enzyme Immunoassays (Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1985); and Fv fragments: Hochman et al Biochemistry, Vol. 12, pgs. 1 130-1 135 (1973), Sharon et al. Biochemistry, Vol. 15, pgs. 1591-1594 (1976) and Ehrlich et al, U.S. Patent 4,355,023; and antibody half molecules: Auditore- Hargreaves, U.S. Patent 4,470,925.
Preferably, monoclonal antibodies, Fv fragments, Fab fragments, or other binding
10 compositions derived from monoclonal antibodies of the invention have a high affinity to Pepl33- related peptides. Preferred antibodies are capable of preferentially recognizing post-translationally modified Pep 133-related peptides (e.g, amidylated). The affinity of monoclonal antibodies and related molecules to Pep 133-related peptides may be measured by conventional techniques including x- ' ' plasmon resonance, ELISA, equilibrium dialysis; and the like. Affinity measurement by plasmon
15 resonance techniques may be carried out, for example, using a BIAcore 2000 instrument (Biacore AB. Uppsala, Sweden) in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended protocol. Preferably, is measured by ELISA, for example, as described in U.S. patent 6,235,883, or like reference. Preferably, the dissociation constant between Pep 133-related peptides and monoclonal antibodies of the invention is less than 10"5 molar. More preferably, such dissociation constant is less than 10"8
20 molar; still more preferably, such dissociation constant is less than 10"9 molar; and most preferably, such dissociation constant is in the range of 10"9 to 10"u molar.
In addition, the antibodies of the present invention are useful for detecting Pep 133-related peptides. Such detection methods are advantageously applied to diagnosis and prognosis of, e.g, aberrant cell growth conditions. The antibodies of the invention may be used in most assays
25 involving antigen-antibody reactions. The assays may be homogeneous or heterogeneous. In a homogeneous assay approach, the sample can be a biological sample or fluid such as serum, urine, whole blood, lymphatic fluid, plasma, saliva, cells, tissue, and material secreted by cells or tissues cultured in vitro. The sample can be pretreated if necessary to remove unwanted materials. The immunological reaction usually involves the specific antibody, labeled analyte, and the sample
30 suspected of containing the analyte. The analyte can be directly labeled with the label or indirectly labeled with a means for incoφorating the label such as conjugation of the analyte to biotin and having labeled avidin or anti-biotin. The signal from the label is modified, directly or indirectly, upon the binding of the antibody of the labeled analyte. Both the immunological reaction and detection of the extent thereof are carried out in a homogeneous solution. In a heterogeneous assay approach, the
35 reagents are usually the sample, the specific antibody, and means for producing a detectable signal. The specimen is generally placed on a support, such as a plate or a slide, and contacted with the antibody in a liquid phase. The support is then separated from the liquid phase and either the support phase or the liquid phase is examined for a detectable signal employing means for producing such signal or signal producing system. The signal is related to the presence of the analyte in the sample. 5 Means for producing a detectable signal includes the use of radioactive labels, fluorescers, enzymes, and so forth. Exemplary of heterogeneous immunoassays are the radioimmunoassay, immunofluorescence methods, enzyme-linked immunoassays, and the like.
One embodiment of an assay employing an antibody of the present invention involves the use of a surface to which the monoclonal antibody of the invention is attached. The underlying structure
10 of the surface may take different forms, have different compositions and may be a mixture of compositions or laminates. The surface may assume a variety of shapes and -forms and may have varied dimensions, depending on the manner of use and measurement. Illustrative surfaces may be pads, beads, discs, or strips, which may be flat, concave or convex. Thickness is not critical, '. generally being from about 0.1 to 2 mm thick and of any convenient diameter or other dimensions.
•15 • ■ - The surface typically will be supported on a rod, .tube, capillary, fiber, strip, disc, plate, cuvette and the like. The surface will typically be porous and polyfunctional or capable of being polyfunctionalized so as to permit covalent binding of the monoclonal antibody of the invention as well as to permit bonding of other compounds which form a part of a means for producing a detectable signal. A wide variety of organic and inorganic polymers, both natural and synthetic, and
20 combinations thereof, may be employed as the material for the solid surface. Illustrative polymers include polyethylene, polypropylene, poly(4-methylbutene), polystyrene, polymethracrylate, poly(ethylene terephthalate), rayon, nylon, poly(vinyl butyrate), silicones, polyformaldehyde, cellulose, cellulose acetate, nitrocellulose, latex, etc. Other useful materials include paper, glasses, ceramics, metals, metaloids, semiconductor materials, cermets, silicates, substrates that form gels,
25 gelatins, lipopolysaccharides, silicates, agarose, polyacrylamides, polymers which form several aqeuous phases such as dextrans, polyalkylene glycols (alkylene of 2 to 3 carbon atoms) or surfactants such as phospholipids. The binding of the monoclonal antibody of the invention to the surface may be accomplished by well known techniques("Immobilized Enzymes," Ichiro Chibata, Press, New York (1978) and Cuatrecasas, J. Bio. Chem, 245: 3059 (1970)). In carrying out the
30 assay in accordance with this of the invention the sample is mixed with aqueous medium and the medium is contacted with the surface having a monoclonal antibody of the invention bound thereto. Members of a signal producing system and any ancillary materials may also be included in the aqueous medium, either concurrently or added subsequently so as to provide a detectable signal associated with the surface. The means for producing the detectable signal can involve the
35 incoφoration in the of a labeled analyte or it may involve the use of a second monoclonal antibody having a label conjugated thereto. Separation and washing steps will be carried out as needed. The signal detected is related to the presence of Pep 133-related peptides in the sample. It is within the scope of the present invention to include a calibration as the measurement surface on the same support. A particular embodiment of an assay in accordance with the present invention, by way of 5 illustration and not limitation, involves the use of a support such as a slide or a well of a petri dish. The technique involves the sample to be analyzed on the support with an appropriate fixing material such as acetone and incubating the sample on the slide with a monoclonal antibody of the invention. After washing with an appropriate buffer such as, for example, phosphate buffered saline, the support is contacted with a labeled specific binding partner for the analyte in the sample. After
10 incubation as desired, the slide is washed a second time with an aqueous buffer and the determination is made of the binding of the labeled monoclonal antibody to the analyte. If the label is fluorescent, the slide may be covered with a fluorescent antibody mounting fluid on a cover slip and then K > . examined with a fluorescent microscope to determine the extent of binding. On the other hand, the . label can be an enzyme conjugated to the monoclonal antibody of the invention and the extent of
•1 . > binding can be determined by examining the slide for the presence of enzyme activity, which may be indicated by the formation of a precipitate, a color, or the like. A particular example of an assay utilizing the present antibodies is a double determinant ELISA assay. A support such as a glass or vinyl plate is coated with antibody specific for Pep 133-related peptides by conventional techniques. The support is contacted with the sample suspected of containing Pep 133-related peptides,
20 usually in aqueous medium. After an incubation period from 30 seconds to 12 hours, the support is separated from the medium, washed to remove unbound Pep 133-related peptides with, for example, water or an aqueous buffered medium, and contacted with an antibody specific for Pep 133-related peptides, again usually in an aqueous medium. The antibody is labeled with an enzyme directly or indirectly such as, e.g , horseradish peroxidase or alkaline phosphatase. After incubation, the support
25 is separated from the medium, and washed as above. The enzyme activity of the support or the aqueous medium is determined. This enzyme activity is related to the amount of Pep 133-related peptides in the sample
The invention also includes kits, e.g, diagnostic assay kits, for carrying out the methods disclosed above In one embodiment, the kit comprises in packaged combination (a) a monoclonal
30 antibody more specifically defined above and (b) a conjugate of a specific binding partner for the above monoclonal antibody and a label capable of producing a detectable signal. The reagents may also include ancillary agents such as buffering agents and protein stabilizing agents, e.g, polysaccharides and the like. The kit may further include, where necessary, other members of the signal producing system of which system the label is a member, agents for reducing background
35 interference in a test, control reagents, apparatus for conducting a test, and the like. In another embodiment, the diagnostic kit comprises a conjugate of monoclonal antibody of the invention and a label capable of producing a detectable signal Ancillary agents as mentioned above may also be present.
An anti-Pep 133-related antibody (e.g , monoclonal antibody) can be used to isolate Pepl33- related peptide by standard techniques, such as affinity chromatography or immunoprecipitation. For example, an anti-Pep 133-related antibody can facilitate the purification of endogenous or recombinantly expressed Pep 133-related peptides from cells. Moreover, an anti-Pep 133-related antibody can be used to detect Pep 133-related peptide (e.g, in a cellular lysate or cell supernatant) in order to evaluate the abundance and pattern of expression of the Pep 133-related peptide. Anti- Pep 133-related antibodies can be used diagnostically to monitor protein levels in tissue as part of a clinical testing procedure, e.g, to, for example, determine the efficacy of a given treatment regimen Detection is facilitated by linking the antibody to any label group.
Protein Arrays Detection, purification, and screening of the polypeptides of the invention may be accomplished using retentate chromatography (preferably, protein arrays or chips), as described by U.S. Patent 6225027 and U.S. Patent Application 20010014461. Briefly, retentate chromatography describes methods in which polypeptides (and/ or other sample components) are retained on an adsorbent (e.g, array or chip) and subsequently detected. Such methods involve (1) selectively adsorbing polypeptides from a sample to a substrate under a plurality of different adsorbent/eluant combinations ("selectivity conditions") and (2) detecting the retention of adsorbed polypeptides by desoφtion spectrometry (e.g, by mass spectrometry). In conventional chromatographic methods, polypeptides are eluted off of the adsorbent prior to detection. The coupling of adsoφtion chromatography with detection by desoφtion spectrometry provides extraordinary sensitivity, the ability to rapidly analyze retained components with a variety of different selectivity conditions, and parallel processing of components adsorbed to different sites (i.e, "affinity sites" or "spots") on the array under different elution conditions.
These methods are useful for: combinatorial, biochemical separation and purification of the Pep 133-related peptides; study of differential gene expression; detection of differences in protein levels (e.g, for diagnosis); and detection of molecular recognition events, (e.g, for screening and drug discovery) Thus, this invention provides a molecular discovery and diagnostic device that is characterized by the inclusion of both parallel and multiplex polypeptide processing capabilities Polypeptides of the invention and Pep 133-related peptide-binding substances are preferably attached to a label group, and thus directly detected, enabling simultaneous transmission of two or more signals from the same "circuit" (i.e, addressable "chip" location) during a single unit operation. Detection of Pep 133-related peptides by mass spectrometry
In accordance with the present invention, any instrument, method, process, etc. can be utilized to determine the identity and abundance of proteins in a sample. A preferred method of 5 obtaining identity is by mass spectrometry, where protein molecules in a sample are ionized and then the resultant mass and charge of the protein ions are detected and determined.
To use mass spectrometry to analyze proteins, it is preferred that the protein be converted to a gas-ion phase. Various methods of protein ionization are useful, including, e.g, fast ion bombardment (FAB), plasma desoφtion, laser desoφtion, thermal desoφtion, preferably,
10 electrospray ionization (ESI) and matrix-assisted laser desoφtion/ionization (MALDI). Many different mass analyzers are available for peptide and protein analysis, including, but not limited to, Time-of-Flight (TOF), ion trap (ITMS), Fourier transform ion cyclotron (FTMS), quadrupole ion trap, and sector (electric and/or magnetic) spectrometers. See, e.g.,' U.S. Pat. No 5,572,025 for an - • • ion-trap MS Mass analyzers can be used alone, or in combination with other mass analyzers in
15 tandem mass spectrometers In the latter case, a first mass analyzer can be use to separate the protein ions (precursor ion) from each other and determine the molecular weights of the various protein constituents in the sample. A second mass analyzer can be used to analyze each separated constituents, e.g, by fragmenting the precursor ions into product ions by using, e.g. an inert gas Any desired combination of mass analyzers can be used, including, e.g, triple quadrupoles, tandem
20 time-of-flights, ion traps, and/or combinations thereof.
Different kinds of detectors can be used to detect the protein ions. For example, destructive detectors can be utilized, such as ion electron multipliers or cryogenic detectors (e.g, U.S. Pat. No. 5,640,010). Additionally, non-destructive detectors can be used, such as ion traps, which are used as ion current pick-up devices in quadrupole ion trap mass analyzers or FTMS.
25 For MALDI-TOF, a number of sample preparation methods can be utilized including, dried droplet (Karasand Hillenkamp, Anal. Chem, 60:2299-2301, 1988), vacuum-drying (Winberger et al. In Proceedings of the 41st ASMS Conference on Mass Spectrometry and Allied Topics, San Francisco, May 31-June 4, 1993, pp 775a-b), crush crystals (Xiang et al. Rapid Comm. Mass Spectrom, 8: 199-204, 1994), slow crystal growing (Xiang et al, Org. Mass Spectrom, 28: 1424-
30 1429, 1993); active film (Mock et al. Rapid Comm. Mass Spectrom,6:233-238, 1992; Bai et al. Anal. Chem, 66:3423-3430, 1994), pneumatic spray (Kochling et al. Proceedings of the 43rd ASMS Conference on Mass Spectrometry and Allied Topics; Atlanta, GA, May 21-26, 1995, p l225); electrospray (Hensel et al. Proceedings of the 43rd ASMS Conference on Mass Spectrometry and Allied Topics; Atlanta, GA, May 21 -26, 1995, p947); fast solvent evaporation
35 (Vorm et al. Anal. Chem, 66:3281-3287, 1994); sandwich (Li et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc, 1 1 8: 1 1662-1 1663, 1996); and two-layer methods (Dal et al. Anal. Chem, 71 :1087-1091, 1999). See also, e.g, Liang et al. Rapid Commun. Mass Spectrom, 10: 1219-1226, 1996; van Adrichemet al. Anal. Chem, 70:923-930, 1998.
For MALDI analysis, samples are prepared as solid-state co-crystals or thin films by mixing 5 them with an energy absorbing compound or colloid (the matrix) in the liquid phase, and ultimately drying the solution to the solid state upon the surface of an inert probe. In some cases an energy absorbing molecule (EAM) is an integral component of the sample presenting surface. Regardless of EAM application strategy, the probe contents are allowed to dry to the solid state prior to introduction into the laser desoφtion/ionization time-of-flight mass spectrometer (LDIMS).
10 Ion detection in TOF mass spectrometry is typically achieved with the use of electro- emissive detectors such as electron multipliers (EMP) or microchannel plates (MCP). Both of these devices function by converting primary incident charged particles into a cascade of secondary, tertiary,, quaternary, etc. electrons. The probability of secondary electrons being generated by the : . • ,. ; impact of a single incident charged particle can be taken to be the ion-to-electron conversion . ,
-■ 15 ,' efficiency of this charged .particle (or more simply, the conversion efficiency). The total electron , yield for cascading events when compared to the total number of incident charged particles is typically described as the detector gain. Because generally the overall response time of MCPs is far superior to that of EMPs, MCPs are the preferred electro-emissive detector for enhancing mass/charge resolving power. However, EMPs function well for detecting ion populations of
20 disbursed kinetic energies, where rapid response time and broad frequency bandwidth are not necessary.
In a preferred aspect, for the analysis of digested proteins, a liquid-chromatography tandem mass spectrometer (LC-TMS) is used. This system provides an additional stage of sample separation via use of a liquid chromatograph followed by tandem mass spectrometry.
25 The methods described herein of separating and fractionating proteins provide individual proteins or fractions containing small numbers of distinct proteins. These proteins can be identified by mass spectral determination of the molecular masses of the protein and peptides resulting from the fragmentation thereof. Making use of available information in protein sequence databases, a comparison can be made between proteolytic peptide mass patterns generated in silico, and
30 experimentally observed peptide masses. A "hit-list" can be compiled, ranking candidate proteins in the database, based on (among other criteria) the number of matches between the theoretical and experimental proteolytic fragments. Methods of peptide mapping and sequencing using MS are described in WO 95/252819, U.S. Pat. No. 5,538,897, U.S. Pat. No. 5,869,240, U.S. Pat. No. 5,572,259, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,696,376. See, also, Yates, J. Mass Spec, 33: 1 (1998).
35 Data collected from a mass spectrometer typically comprises the intensity and mass to charge ratio for each detected event. Spectral data can be recorded in any suitable form, including, e g , in graphical, numerical, or electronic formats, either in digital or analog form. Spectra are preferably recorded in a storage medium, including, e.g, magnetic, such as floppy disk, tape, or hard disk, optical, such as CD-ROM or laser-disc; or, ROM-CHIPS. 5 The mass spectrum of a given sample typically provides information on protein intensity, mass to charge ratio, and molecular weight. In preferred embodiments of the invention, the molecular weights of proteins in the sample are used as a matching criterion to query a database. The molecular weights are calculated conventionally, e.g., by subtracting the mass of the ionizing proton for singly- charged protonated molecular ions, by multiplying the measured mass/charge ratio by the number of 10 charges for multiply-charged ions and subtracting the number of ionizing protons.
Various databases are useful in accordance with the present invention. Useful databases include, databases containing genomic sequences, expressed gene sequences, and/or expressed protein sequences. Preferred databases contain nucleotide sequence-derived molecular masses of "• - - proteins present in a known organism, organ, tissue, or cell-type. There are a number of algorithms 5 . to identify, open reading frames (ORF) and convert nucleotide sequences into protein sequence and molecular weight information. Several publicly accessible databases are available, including, the SwissPROT/TrEMBL database (http://www.expasy.ch).
Typically, a mass spectrometer is equipped with commercial software that identifies peaks above a certain threshold level, calculates mass, charge, and intensity of detected ions. Correlating 20 molecular weight with a given output peak can be accomplished directly from the spectral data, i.e , where the charge on an ion is one and the molecular weight is therefore equal to the numerator value - minus the mass of the ionizing proton. However, protein ions can be complexed with various counter-ions and adducts, such as N, C, and K\ In such a case, it would be expected that a given protein ion would exhibit multiple peaks, such as a triplet, representing different ionic states (or 25 species) of the same protein. Thus, it may be necessary to analyze and process spectral data to determine families of peaks arising from the same protein. This analysis can be carried out conventionally, e.g , as described by Mann et al , anal. Chem, 61.1702-1708 (1989)
In matching a molecular mass calculated from a mass spectrometer to a molecular mass predicted from a database, such as a genomic or expressed gene database, post-translation 30 processing may have to be considered. There are various processing events which modify protein structure, including, proteolytic processing, removal of N-terminal methionine, acetylation, methylation, glycosylation, phosphorylation, etc.
A database can be queried for a range of proteins matching the molecular mass of the unknown The range window can be determined by the accuracy of the instrument, the method by 35 which the sample was prepared, etc. Based on the number of hits (where a hit is match) in the spectrum, the unknown protein or peptide is identified or classified.
Methods of identifying one or more Pep 133-related peptide by mass spectrometry are useful for detection of one or more Pep 133-related peptide present in human plasma. Exemplary techniques are described in U.S. Patent Applications 02/0060290, 02/0137106, 02/0138208, 02/0142343, 5 02/0155509.
Diagnostic and Prognostic Uses
The nucleic acid molecules, proteins, protein homologues, and antibodies described herein can be used in one or more of the following methods: diagnostic assays, prognostic assays, 10 monitoring clinical trials, and pharmacogenetics as further described herein.
The invention provides diagnostic and prognostic assays for detecting Pep 133-related peptide nucleic acids and proteins, as further described. Also provided are diagnostic and prognostic assays for detecting interactions between Pep 133-related peptides and target molecules, particularly , *• natural agonists and antagonists. - , , . , - , - ;• *- , .. , ,<
' 15..- i . . ι -...The present invention provides methods for identifying polypeptides that are differentially - expressed between two or more samples. "Differential expression" refers to differences in the quantity or quality of a polypeptide between samples. Such differences could result at any stage of protein expression from transcription through post-translational modification. For example, using protein array methods, two samples are bound to affinity spots on different sets of adsorbents (e g , 20 chips) and recognition maps are compared to identify polypeptides that are differentially retained by the two sets of adsorbents Differential retention includes quantitative retention as well as qualitative differences in the polypeptide. For example, differences in post-translational modification of a protein can result in differences in recognition maps detectable as differences in binding characteristics (e.g, glycosylated proteins bind differently to lectin adsorbents) or differences in 25 mass (e.g, post-translational cleavage products). In certain embodiments, an adsorbent can have an array of affinity spots selected for a combination of markers diagnostic for a disease or syndrome. Differences in polypeptide levels between samples (e.g , differentially expressed Pep 133- related peptides in plasma samples) can be identified by exposing the samples to a variety of conditions for analysis by desoφtion spectrometry (e.g, mass spectrometry). Unknown proteins can 30 be identified by detecting physicochemical characteristics (e.g, molecular mass), and this information can be used to search databases for proteins having similar profiles.
Preferred methods of detecting a Pep 133-related peptide utilize mass spectrometry techniques Such methods provide information about the size and character of the particular Pep 133-related peptide isoform that is present in a sample, e.g, a biological sample submitted for 35 diagnosis or prognosis. Mass spectrometry techniques are detailed in the section titled "Detection of Pep 133-related peptides by mass spectrometry". The invention provides a method of detecting a Pep 133-related peptide in a biological sample comprising the steps of fractionating a biological sample (e g, serum, lymph, cerebrospinal fluid, cell lysate of a particular tissue) by at least one chromatographic step; subjecting a fraction to mass spectrometry; comparing the characteristics of 5 peptide species observed in mass spectrometry with known characteristics of Pep 133-related peptides.
The isolated nucleic acid molecules of the invention can be used, for example, to detect Pep 133-related mRNA (e.g, in a biological sample) or a genetic alteration in a Pepl33-encoding gene, and to modulate a Pep 133-related peptide activity, as described further below. The Pepl33-
10 related peptide can be used to treat disorders characterized by insufficient production of a Pep l33- related peptide or by excessive production of a Pep 133-related peptide target molecule. In addition, the Pep 133-related peptides can be used to screen for naturally occurring target molecules, to screen . for drugs or compounds which modulate, preferably activate Pep 133-related peptide activity, as well :, - as to treat disorders characterized by insufficient production of Pep 133-related peptide or production
- 15 , of Pep 133-related peptide forms which have decreased or aberrant activity compared to wild type. Moreover, the anti- Pep 133-related peptide antibodies of the invention can be used to detect and isolate Pep 133-related peptide, regulate the bioavailability of Pep 133-related peptide, and modulate Pep 133-related peptide activity.
Accordingly one embodiment of the present invention involves a method of use (e.g, a
20 diagnostic or prognostic assay) wherein a molecule of the present invention (e.g, a Pep 133-related peptide, nucleic acid, antibody, or modulator) is used, for example, to diagnose, prognose and/or treat a disorder in which any of the aforementioned Pep 133-related peptide activities is indicated. In another embodiment, the present invention involves a method of use wherein a molecule of the present invention is used, for example, for the diagnosis, prognosis, and/or treatment of subjects,
25 preferably a human subject, in which any of the aforementioned activities is pathologically perturbed. In a preferred embodiment, the methods of use involve administering to a subject, preferably a human subject, a molecule of the present invention for the diagnosis, prognosis, and/or therapeutic treatment. In another embodiment, the methods of use involve administering to a human subject a molecule of the present invention.
30 For example, the invention encompasses a method of determining whether a Pep 133-related peptide is expressed within a biological sample comprising: a) contacting said biological sample with: l) a polynucleotide that hybridizes under stringent conditions to a Pep 133-related nucleic acid; or ii) a detectable polypeptide (e.g. antibody) that selectively binds to a Pep 133-related peptide; and b) detecting the presence or absence of hybridization between said polynucleotide and an RNA
35 species within said sample, or the presence or absence of binding of said detectable polypeptide to a polypeptide within said sample. Detection of said hybridization or of said binding indicates that said Pep 133-related peptide is expressed within said sample. Preferably, the polynucleotide is a primer, and wherein said hybridization is detected by detecting the presence of an amplification product comprising said primer sequence, or the detectable polypeptide is an antibody. In certain embodiments, detection involves the use of a probe/primer in a polymerase chain reaction (PCR) (see, e.g, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,683,195 and 4,683,202), such as anchor PCR or RACE PCR, or, alternatively, in a ligation chain reaction (LCR) (see, e.g, Landegren et al. (1988) Science 24 I T 077- 1080, and Nakazawa et al (1994) PNAS 91360-364), the latter of which can be particularly useful for detecting point mutations in the Pep 133-related peptide-encoding-gene (see Abravaya et al (1995) Nucleic Acids Res. 23 675-682).
Also envisioned is a method of determining whether a mammal, preferably human, has an elevated or reduced level of expression of a Pep 133-related peptide, comprising: a) providing a .. biological sample from said mammal; and b) comparing the amount of a Pep 133-related peptide- or - • , <of a Pep 133-related RNA species within said biological sample with a level detected in or expected . from a control sample. An increased amount of said Pep 133-related'peptide or said RNA species - within said biological sample compared to said level detected in or expected from said control sample indicates that said mammal has an elevated level of Pep 133-related peptide expression, and a decreased amount of said Pep 133-related peptide or said RNA species within said biological sample compared to said level detected in or expected from said control sample indicates that said mammal has a reduced level of expression of a Pep 133-related peptide.
The present invention also pertains to the field of predictive medicine in which diagnostic assays, prognostic assays, and monitoring clinical trials are used for prognostic puφoses to thereby treat an individual prophylactically. Accordingly, one aspect of the present invention relates to diagnostic assays for determining Pep 133-related peptide and/or nucleic acid expression as well as Pep 133 -related peptide activity, in the context of a biological sample (e.g, blood, serum, cells, tissue) to thereby determine whether an individual is afflicted with a disease or disorder, or is at risk of developing a disorder, associated with aberrant Pep 133 -related peptide expression or activity The invention also provides for prognostic (or predictive) assays for determining whether an individual is at risk of developing a disorder associated with a Pep 133-related peptide, nucleic acid expression or activity. For example, mutations in a Pep 133-related peptide -encoding gene can be assayed in a biological sample. Such assays can be used for prognostic or predictive puφose to thereby prophylactically treat an individual prior to the onset of a disorder characterized by or associated with Pep 133-related peptide expression or activity.
The term "biological sample" is intended to include tissues, cells and biological fluids isolated from an individual, as well as tissues, cells and fluids present within an individual. That is, the detection methods of the invention can be used to detect a Pep 133-related peptide mRNA, protein, or genomic DNA in a biological sample in vitro as well as in vivo. Preferred biological samples are biological fluids such as lymph, cerebrospinal fluid, blood, and especially blood serum For example, in vitro techniques for detection of a Pep 133-related peptide mRNA include Northern 5 hybridizations and in situ hybridizations. In vitro techniques for detection of a Pep 133-related peptide include mass spectrometry, enzyme linked immunosorbent assays (ELISAs), Western blots, immunoprecipitations and lmmunofluorescence. In vitro techniques for detection of a Pep 133 -related peptide -encoding genomic DNA include Southern hybridizations. Furthermore, in vivo techniques for detection of a Pep 133-related peptide include introducing into an individual a labeled anti-
10 Pep 133-related peptide antibody.
In preferred embodiments, the subject methods can be characterized by generally comprising detecting, in a tissue sample of the individual (e.g. a human patient), the presence or absence of a genetic lesion characterized by at least one of (i) a mutation of a gene encoding one of the subject -- < .• - Pep 133-related peptide or (ii) the' mis-expression of a Pepl33 gene. To illustrate, such genetic •
. 15 < , lesions can be detected by ascertaining the existence of at least one of (i) a deletion of one or more nucleotides from the Pep 133 gene, (ii) an addition of one or more nucleotides to the gene, (iii) a substitution of one or more nucleotides of the gene, (iv) a gross chromosomal rearrangement or amplification of the gene, (v) a gross alteration in the level of a messenger RNA transcript of the gene, (vi) aberrant modification of the gene, such as of the methylation pattern of the genomic DNA,
20 (vii) the presence of a non-wild type splicing pattern of a messenger RNA transcript of the gene, and (viii) reduced level of expression, indicating lesion in regulatory element or reduced stability of a Pep 133-related transcript.
In yet another exemplary embodiment, aberrant methylation patterns of a Pep 133-related peptide nucleic acid can be detected by digesting genomic DNA from a patient sample with one or
25 more restriction endonucleases that are sensitive to methylation and for which recognition sites exist in the Pep 133 gene (including in the flanking and intronic sequences). See, for example, Buiting et al (1994) Human Mol Genet 3:893-895 Digested DNA is separated by gel electrophoresis, and hybridized with probes derived from, for example, genomic or cDNA sequences. The methylation status of the Pep 133 gene can be determined by comparison of the restriction pattern generated from
30 the sample DNA with that for a standard of known methylation.
In yet another embodiment, a diagnostic assay is provided which detects the ability of a Pep 133-related peptide to bind to a cell surface or extracellular protein. For instance, it will be desirable to detect Pep 133-related peptide mutants which, while expressed at appreciable levels in the cell, are defective at binding a Pep 133-related peptide target protein (having either diminished or
35 enhanced binding affinity for the target) Such mutants may arise, for example, from mutations, e g , point mutants, which may be impractical to detect by the diagnostic DNA sequencing techniques or by the immunoassays described above. The present invention accordingly further contemplates diagnostic screening assays which generally comprise cloning one or more Pep 133 gene from the sample tissue, and expressing the cloned genes under conditions which permit detection of an 5 interaction between that recombinant gene product and a target protein. As will be apparent from the description of the various assays set forth herein under the Section entitled "Drug screening assays", a wide variety of techniques can be used to determine the ability of a Pep 133-related peptide to bind to other components. These techniques can be used to detect mutations in a Pep 133 gene, which give rise to mutant proteins with a higher or lower binding affinity for a Pep 133 target protein relative to
10 the wild-type Pep 133-related peptide. Conversely, by switching which of the Pepl33 target protein and Pep 133-related peptide is the "bait" and which is derived from the patient sample, the subject assay can also be used to detect target protein mutants which have a higher or lower binding affinity for a Pep 133-related peptide relative to a wild type form of that target protein.
. . . . .. , ' - In an exemplary embodiment, a target protein can be provided as an immobilized protein (a
, 15 ,..-."target"); such as by use of GST fusion proteins and glutathione treated microtitre plates as described herein.
In another embodiment, the methods further involve obtaining a control biological sample from a control subject, contacting the control sample with a compound or agent capable of detecting a Pep 133-related peptide, mRNA, or genomic DNA, such that the presence of a Pep 133-related
20 peptide, mRNA or genomic DNA is detected in the biological sample, and comparing the presence of a Pep 133-related peptide, mRNA or genomic DNA in the control sample with the presence of a Pep 133-related peptide, mRNA or genomic DNA in the test sample. The invention also encompasses kits for detecting the presence of a Pep 133-related peptide, mRNA or genomic DNA in a biological sample. For example, the kit comprises: a labeled compound or agent capable of
25 detecting a Pep 133-related peptide, mRNA or genomic DNA in a biological sample; means for determining the amount of a Pep 133-related peptide in the sample; and means for comparing the amount of Pep 133-related peptide in the sample with a standard. The compound or agent can be packaged in a suitable container. The kit can further comprise instructions for using the kit to detect Pep 133 -related peptide or nucleic acid
30
Drug screening assays
The invention provides a method (also referred to herein as a "screening assay") for identifying modulators (e g., small molecules, peptides, antibodies, peptidomimetics, or other drugs) which bind to Pep 133-related peptides, have an inhibitory or activating effect on, for example,
35 Pep 133-related peptide expression or activity or the activity of a Pep 133-related target molecule In some embodiments small molecules can be generated using combinatorial chemistry or can be obtained from a natural products library. Assays may be cell based or non-cell based assays Drug screening assays may be binding assays or more preferentially functional assays, as further described. Agents that are found to increase Pep 133-related peptide activity may be used, for example, to reduce cell growth or as antitumoral agents alone or in combination with other appropriate agents or treatments This may be applied to control the growth of rapidly dividing cells, for example, to reduce an immune response or aberrant cell growth in a nonhuman or human mammal In addition, agonists are useful antiviral agents, and may be applied to cultured cells or nonhuman mammals in antiviral drug development Agents found to inhibit Pep 133-related peptide activity may be used, for example, to modulate antitumoral or antiinflammatory treatment regimens or to promote survival of beneficial cells (e.g, hair follicle cells). As a further example, Pep 133-related peptide inhibitors are useful growth promoters for cultured cells to postpone senescence. -
,. ., . Protein array methods are useful for screening and drug discovery. For example, one member of a receptor/ ligand pair is docked to an adsorbent, and its ability to bind, the binding partner is determined in the presence of the test substance. Because of the rapidity with which adsoφtion can be tested, combinatorial libraries of test substances can be easily screened for their ability to modulate the interaction. In preferred screening methods, Pep 133-related peptides are docked to the adsorbent. Binding partners are preferably labeled, thus enabling detection of the interaction. Alternatively, in certain embodiments, a test substance is docked to the adsorbent. The polypeptides of the invention are exposed to the test substance and screened for binding Preferred test substances include substances correlated with a disease or disorder, such as a protein, lipid, or endocrine factor differentially present in disease.
In other embodiments, an assay is a cell-based assay in which a cell which expresses a Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to inhibit, activate, or increase Pep 133-related activity determined. Determining the ability of the test compound to inhibit, activate, or increase Pep 133-related activity can be accomplished by monitoring the bioactivity of the Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof. The cell, for example, can be of mammalian origin, insect origin, bacterial origin or a yeast cell. For example, in some embodiments, the cell can be a mammalian cell, bacterial cell or yeast cell which has been engineered to lack a natural inhibitor of a Pep 133-related peptides.
In one embodiment, the invention provides assays for screening candidate compounds, which are target molecules of a Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof. In another embodiment, the invention provides assays for screening candidate compounds, which bind to or modulate the activity of a Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof. The test compounds of the present invention can be obtained using any of the numerous approaches in combinatorial library methods known in the art, including: biological libraries; spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries; synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution; the ' one-bead one-compound' library method; and synthetic library methods using affinity 5 chromatography selection. The biological library approach is used with peptide libraries, while the other four approaches are applicable to peptide, non-peptide oligomer or small molecule libraries of compounds (Lam, K. S. (1997) Anticancer Drug Des. 12: 145).
Examples of methods for the synthesis of molecular libraries can be found in the art, for example in: DeWitt et al. (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 90:6909; Erb et al. (1994) Proc. 10 Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91: 1 1422; Zuckermann et al (1994). J. Med. Chem. 37:2678; Cho et al.
(1993) Science 261: 1303; Carrell et al. (1994) Angevv. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl. 33:2059; Carell et al.
(1994) Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl. 33:2061; and in Gallop et al. (1994) J. Med. Chem. 37: 1233. .. ;..-." - ( . Libraries of compounds may be presented in solution (e.g, Houghten (1992) Biotechniques :,ι-. .,r 13:412-421), or on beads (Lam (1991>Nature'354:82-84), chips (Fodor (1993) Nature 364:555-
,1-5 , ..-556), bacteria (Ladner U:S. -Pat. No. 5,223,409), spores (Ladner U.S.'Pat. No. '409), plasmids (Cull et al. (1992) Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 89: 1865-1869) or on phage (Scott and Smith (1990) Science 249:386-390); (Devin (1990) Science 249:404-406); (Cwirla et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 87:6378-6382); (Felici (1991) J. Mol. Biol. 222:301-310); (Ladner supra.). ■
Determining the ability of the test compound to inhibit or increase Pep 133-related activity
20 can also be accomplished, for example, by coupling the Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof with a radioisotope or enzymatic label such that binding of the Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof to its cognate target molecule can be determined by detecting the labeled Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof in a complex. The labeled molecule is placed in contact with its cognate molecule and the extent of complex formation
25 is measured. For example, the extent of complex formation may be measured by immuno precipitating the complex or by performing gel electrophoresis.
It is also within the scope of this invention to determine the ability of a compound (e.g. Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof) to interact with its cognate target molecule without the labeling of any of the interactants. For example, a microphysiometer can be
30 used to detect the interaction of a compound with its cognate target molecule without the labeling of either the compound or the target molecule. McConnell, H. M. et al. (1992) Science 257: 1906-1912. A microphysiometer such as a cytosensor is an analytical instrument that measures the rate at which a cell acidifies its environment using a light-addressable potentiometric sensor (LAPS). Changes in this acidification rate can be used as an indicator of the interaction between compound and receptor.
35 In a preferred embodiment, the assay comprises contacting a cell which expresses a Pep 133- related peptide or biologically active portion thereof, with a target molecule to form an assay mixture, contacting the assay mixture with a test compound, and determining the ability of the test compound to inhibit or increase the activity of the Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof, wherein determining the ability of the test compound to inhibit or increase the 5 activity of the Pep 133 -related peptide or biologically active portion thereof, comprises determining the ability of the test compound to inhibit or increase a biological activity of the Pep 133-related peptide expressing cell.
In another preferred embodiment, the assay comprises contacting a cell which is responsive to a Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof, with a Pep 133-related peptide or 0 biologically-active portion thereof, to form an assay mixture, contacting the assay mixture with a test compound, and determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of the Pepl33- related peptide or biologically active portion thereof, wherein determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of the Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion , , ,.-. thereof comprises- determining the ability of the test compound to modulate a biological activity of 5 the Pep 133-related peptide-responsive cell ' - :- •. . ' ,5 -'1 -• *• ; , -' • ;. . ; • - .
In another embodiment, an assay is a cell-based assay comprising contacting a cell expressing a Pep 133-related target molecule (i.e. a molecule with which Pep 133-related peptides interact) with a test compound and determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of the Pep 133-related target molecule. Determining the ability of the test compound to 0 modulate the activity of a Pep 133-related target molecule can be accomplished, for example, by assessing the activity of a target molecule.
Determining the ability of the Pep 133-related peptide to interact with a Pep 133-related target molecule, such as a natural Pep 133-related inhibitor, can be accomplished by one of the methods described for determining direct binding. In a preferred embodiment, determining the ability of the 5 Pep 133-related peptide to interact with a Pep 133-related target molecule can be accomplished by determining the activity of the target molecule. For example, the activity of the target molecule can be determined by contacting the target molecule with the Pep 133-related peptide or a fragment thereof and measuring induction of a cellular second messenger of the target (i.e intracellular Ca2+, diacylglycerol, IP3, etc.), detecting catalytic/enzymatic activity of the target on appropriate 0 substrate, detecting the induction of a reporter gene (comprising a target-responsive regulatory element operatively linked to a nucleic acid encoding a detectable marker, e.g , luciferase), or detecting a target-regulated cellular response, for example, signal transduction or proteimprotein interactions.
In yet another embodiment, an assay of the present invention is a cell-free assay in which a 5 Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to bind to the Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof is determined. Binding of the test compound to the Pep 133-related peptide can be determined either directly or indirectly as described above. In a preferred embodiment, the assay includes contacting the Pep 133 -related peptide or biologically active portion thereof with a known compound 5 which binds Pep 133-related peptides (e.g, a Pep 133-related target molecule) to form an assay mixture, contacting the assay mixture with a test compound, and determining the ability of the test compound to interact with a Pep 133-related peptide, wherein determining the ability of the test compound to interact with a Pep 133-related peptide comprises determining the ability of the test compound to preferentially bind to Pep 133-related peptides or biologically active portion thereof as
10 compared to the known compound.
In another embodiment, the assay is a cell-free assay in which a Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of the Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion '■„ - ! .' thereof is determined/Determining the ability of the test compound- to modulate the activity of a
15 • Pep 133 -related peptide can be accomplished, for example, by determining the ability of the Pepl33- related peptide to bind directly to a Pep 133-related target molecule or by using a technology such as real-time Biomolecular Interaction Analysis (BIA). Sjolander, S. and Urbaniczky, C. (1991) Anal. Chem. 63:2338-2345 and Szabo et al. (1995) Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 5:699-705. As used herein, "BIA" is a technology for studying biospecific interactions in real time, without labeling any of the
20 interactants (e.g, BIAcore). Changes in the optical phenomenon of surface plasmon resonance (SPR) can be used as an indication of real-time reactions between biological molecules.
In an alternative embodiment, determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of a Pep 133-related peptide can be accomplished by determining the ability of the Pep 133- related peptide to further modulate the activity of a downstream effector (e.g, a growth factor
25 mediated signal transduction pathway component) of a Pep 133-related target molecule. For example, the activity of the effector molecule on an appropriate target can be determined or the binding of the effector to an appropriate target can be determined as previously described.
In yet another embodiment, the cell-free assay involves contacting a Pep 133-related peptide or biologically active portion thereof with a known compound which binds the Pep 133-related
30 peptide to form an assay mixture, contacting the assay mixture with a test compound, and determining the ability of the test compound to interact with the Pep 133-related peptide, wherein determining the ability of the test compound to interact with the Pepl33-related peptide comprises determining the ability of the Pep 133-related peptide to preferentially bind to or modulate the activity of a Pep 133-related target molecule.
35 The cell-free assays of the present invention are amenable to use of both soluble and/or membrane-bound forms of isolated proteins (e.g Pep 133-related peptides or biologically active portions thereof or molecules to which Pep 133-related peptides targets bind). In the case of cell-free assays in which a membrane-bound form an isolated protein is used it may be desirable to utilize a solubilizing agent such that the membrane-bound form of the isolated protein is maintained in solution. Examples of such solubilizing agents include non-ionic detergents such as n-octylglucoside, n-dodecylglucoside, n-dodecylmaltoside, octanoyl-N-methylglucamide, decanoyl-N-methylglucamide, Triton TM X-100, Triton TM X-114, Thesit TM, Isotridecypoly(ethylene glycol ether)n,3-[(3- cholamidopropyl)dιmethyIamminio]- 1 -propane sulfonate (CHAPS), 3-[(3- cholamidopropyl)dimethylamminio] -2 -hydroxy- 1 -propane sulfonate (CHAPSO), or N-dodecyl=N,N- dimethyl-3 -ammonio- 1 -propane sulfonate
In more than one embodiment of the above assay methods, it may be desirable to immobilize either a Pep 133-related peptide or its target molecule to facilitate separation of complexed from uncomplexed forms of one or both of the proteins, as well as to accommodate automation of the assay. Binding of a test compound to a Pepl33?related peptide, or interaction of a Pep 133 -related peptide with a target molecule in the presence andnabsence of a candidate compound, can be ■■ accomplished in any vessel suitable for containing the reactants and by any immobilization protocol described herein. Alternatively, the complexes can be dissociated from the matrix, and the level of Pep 133-related peptides binding or activity determined using standard techniques.
Other techniques for immobilizing proteins on matrices can also be used in the screening assays of the invention. For example, either a Pep 133-related peptide or a Pep 133-related target molecule can be immobilized utilizing conjugation of biotin and streptavidin. Biotinylated Pep 133- related peptide or target molecules can be prepared from biotin-NHS (N-hydroxy-succinimide) using techniques well known in the art (e.g, biotinylation kit, Pierce Chemicals, Rockford, 111.), and immobilized in the wells of streptavidin-coated 96 well plates (Pierce Chemical). Alternatively, antibodies reactive with Pep 133-related peptide or target molecules but which do not interfere with binding of the Pep 133-related peptide to its target molecule can be derivatized to the wells of the plate, and unbound target or Pep 133 -related peptide trapped in the wells by antibody conjugation Methods for detecting such complexes, in addition to those described above for the GST-immobilized complexes, include immunodetection of complexes using antibodies reactive with the Pep 133-related peptide or target molecule, as well as enzyme-linked assays which rely on detecting an enzymatic activity associated with the Pep 133 -related peptide or target molecule.
In another embodiment, modulators of Pep 133 -related peptides expression are identified in a method wherein a cell is contacted with a candidate compound and the expression of Pep 133-related peptides mRNA or protein in the cell is determined. The level of expression of Pep 133-related peptides mRNA or protein in the presence of the candidate compound is compared to the level of expression of Pep 133-related peptides mRNA or protein in the absence of the candidate compound. The candidate compound can then be identified as a modulator of Pep 133-related peptides expression based on this comparison. For example, when expression of Pep 133-related peptides mRNA or protein is greater (statistically significantly greater) in the presence of the candidate compound than 5 in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as a stimulator of Pep 133-related peptides mRNA or protein expression Alternatively, when expression of Pep 133-related peptides mRNA or protein is less (statistically significantly less) in the presence of the candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as an inhibitor of Pep 133-related peptides mRNA or protein expression. The level of Pep 133-related peptides mRNA or protein expression in the cells can
10 be determined by methods described herein for detecting Pep 133-related peptides mRNA or protein. In yet another aspect of the invention, the Pep 133-related peptides can be used as "bait proteins" in a two-hybrid assay or three-hybrid assay (see, e.g, U.S Pat. No. 5,283,317; Zervos et .,al. (1993) Cell 72 223-232; Madura et al. (1993) J. Biol. Chem. 268: 12046-12054; Bartel et al. . v:,. (1993) Biotechniques 14:920-924; Iwabuchi et al.-(1993)Oncogene 8d 693-1696; and Brent " ■, 15 , -WO94/.10300), to identify other proteins, which bind to or interact with Pep 133-related peptides " ' ' ("Pep 133-related peptides-binding proteins" or "Pep 133-related peptides-bp") and are involved in Pep 133-related activity Such Pep 133-related peptides-binding proteins are also likely to be involved in the propagation of signals by the Pep 133-related peptides or Pep 133-related peptides targets as, for example, downstream elements of a Pep 133 -related peptides-mediated signaling pathway.
20 Alternatively, such Pep 133-related peptides-binding proteins are likely to be Pep 133-related inhibitors.
The two-hybrid system is based on the modular nature of most transcription factors, which consist of separable DNA-binding and activation domains. Briefly, the assay utilizes two different DNA constructs. In one construct, the gene that codes for a Pep 133-related peptide or a fragment
25 thereof is fused to a gene encoding the DNA binding domain of a known transcription factor (e.g, GAL-4) In the other construct, a DNA sequence, from a library of DNA sequences, that encodes an unidentified protein ("prey" or "sample") is fused to a gene that codes for the activation domain of the known transcription factor. If the "bait" and the "prey" proteins are able to interact, in vivo, forming a Pep 133-related peptides -dependent complex, the DNA-binding and activation domains of
30 the transcription factor are brought into close proximity This proximity allows transcription of a reporter gene (e.g, LacZ) which is operably linked to a transcriptional regulatory site responsive to the transcription factor Expression of the reporter gene can be detected and cell colonies containing the functional transcription factor can be isolated and used to obtain the cloned gene, which encodes the protein, which interacts with the Pep 133-related peptide.
35 This invention further pertains to novel agents identified by the above-described screening assays and to processes for producing such agents by use of these assays. Accordingly, in one embodiment, the present invention includes a compound or agent obtainable by a method comprising the steps of any one of the aforementioned screening assays (e.g, cell-based assays or cell-free assays) Accordingly, it is within the scope of this invention to further use an agent identified in a 5 described screening assay in an appropriate animal model. For example, an agent identified as described herein (e.g, a Pep 133-related peptide modulating agent) can be used in an animal model to determine the efficacy, toxicity, or side effects of treatment with such an agent. Alternatively, an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the mechanism of action of such an agent. Furthermore, this invention pertains to uses of novel agents identified by the 10 above-described screening assays for treatments as described herein.
The present invention also pertains to uses of novel agents identified by the above-described screening assays for diagnoses, prognoses, and treatments as described herein. Accordingly, it is within the scope of the present invention to use such agents in the design, formulation, synthesis, . . .. .. . manufacture, and/orproduction of a drug or pharmaceutical composition for use in diagnosis, - ,, 15 „,, prognosis, or treatment, as described herein. For example, in one embodiment, the present invention includes a method of synthesizing or producing a drug or pharmaceutical composition by reference to the structure and/or properties of a compound obtainable by one of the above-described screening assays..
20 Pharmaceutical Compositions
When polypeptides of the present invention are expressed in soluble form, for example as a secreted product of transformed yeast or mammalian cells, they can be purified according to standard procedures of the art, including steps of ammonium sulfate precipitation, ion exchange chromatography, gel filtration, electrophoresis, affinity chromatography, and/or the like, e.g
25 "Enzyme Purification and Related Techniques," Methods in Enzymology, 22:233-577 (1977), and Scopes, R, Protein Purification: Principles and Practice (Springer- Verlag, New York, 1982) provide guidance in such purifications. Likewise, when polypeptides of the invention are expressed in insoluble form, for example as aggregates, they can be purified by standard procedures in the art, including separating the inclusion bodies from disrupted host cells by centrifugation, solubilizing the
30 inclusion bodies with chaotropic and reducing agents, diluting the solubilized mixture, and lowering the concentration of chaotropic agent and reducing agent so that the polypeptide takes on a biologically active conformation The latter procedures are disclosed in the following references-
Winkler et al, Biochemistry, 25: 4041-4045 (1986); Winkler et al, Biotechnology, 3: 992-998
(1985); Koths et al, U S. patent 4,569,790; and European patent applications 86306917.5 and
35 86306353 3.
Compounds capable of inhibiting a Pep 133-related activity, preferably small molecules, may be incoφorated into pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration. Such compositions typically comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. As used herein the language "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" is intended to include any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absoφtion delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration. The use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active compound, use thereof in the compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active compounds can also be incoφorated into the compositions A pharmaceutical composition of the invention is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration. Examples of routes of administration include parenteral, e g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, oral (e.g, inhalation), transdermal (topical), transmucosal, and rectal administration. Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, or subcutaneous application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene- glycofor other synthetic solvents; -■ • .antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide. The parenteral preparation can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.
Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions (where water soluble) or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersion. For intravenous administration, suitable carriers include physiological saline, bacteriostatic water, Cremophor EL® (BASF, Parsippany, N.J.) or phosphate buffered saline (PBS). In all cases, the composition must be sterile and should be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyetheylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof. The proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. Prevention of the action microorganisms can be achieved by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, ascorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, for example, sugars, polyalcohols such as manitol, sorbitol, sodium chloride in the composition. Prolonged absoφtion of the injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent which delays absoφtion, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
Where the active compound is a protein, e.g, a Pep 133-related peptide or anti-Pepl33- related antibody, sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incoφoratmg the active compound in 5 the required amount of an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization Generally, dispersions are prepared by incoφorating the active compound into a sterile vehicle which contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum drying 10 and freeze-drying which yields a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
Oral compositions generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They can be , ■ enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets. For the puφose of oral therapeutic - > • administration; the active compound can be incoφorated with excipients and used'in the form of _.15 tablets, troches, or.capsules. For administration by inhalation, the cornpounds are delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from pressured container or dispenser, which contains a suitable propellant, e.g , a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer. Systemic administration can also be by transmucosal or transdermal means. For transmucosal or transdermal administration, penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally 20 known in the art. and include, for example, for transmucosal administration, detergents, bile salts, and fusidic acid derivatives. Transmucosal administration can be accomplished through the use of nasal sprays or suppositories For transdermal administration, the active compounds are formulated into ointments, salves, gels, or creams as generally known in the art. Most preferably, active compound is delivered to a subject by intravenous injection. 25 In one embodiment, the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems. Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent 30 to those skilled in the art. The materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Coφoration and Nova Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liposomal suspensions (including liposomes targeted to infected cells with monoclonal antibodies to viral antigens) can also be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No 4,522,81 1
In a further embodiment, the active compound (e.g, a Pep 133-related peptide) may be 35 coated on a microchip drug delivery device. Such devices are useful for controlled delivery of proteinaceous compositions into the bloodstream, cerebrospinal fluid, lymph, or tissue of an individual without subjecting such compositions to digestion or subjecting the individual to injection Methods of using microchip drug delivery devices are described in US Patents 6, 123,861 and 5.797,898 and US Patent application 200201 19176A1. 5 It is especially advantageous to formulate oral or preferably parenteral compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. Dosage unit form as used herein refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subject to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. The specification for the
10 dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on the unique characteristics of the active compound and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an active compound for the treatment of individuals. , . • -, • > • \ • . . • .
•, , ,-. ... oxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such compounds can be determined by standard' •;-.
,„15 ,'„ pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g, for determining the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population). The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50. Compounds with large therapeutic indices are preferred. While compounds that exhibit toxic side effects may be used, care should be taken to design a
20 delivery system that targets such compounds to the site of affected tissue in order to minimize potential damage to uninfected cells and, thereby, reduce side effects.
The data obtained from the cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans. The dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity. The dosage may vary
25 within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized. For any compound used in the method of the invention, the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays. A dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC50 (i.e, the concentration of the test compound, which achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture.
30 Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans. Levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.
The pharmaceutical compositions can be included in a container, pack, or dispenser together with instructions for administration.
Having generally described this invention, a further understanding can be obtained by
35 reference to certain specific examples, which are provided herein for puφoses of illustration only, and are not intended to be limiting unless otherwise specified. Each of the references sited herein are incoφorated by reference in their entireties
EXAMPLES
Example 1: Chemical Synthesis of a Pepl 33-related peptide
In this example, a Pep 133 -related peptide of the invention is synthesized. Peptide fragment intermediates are first synthesized and then assembled into the desired polypeptide.
A Pep 133-related peptide can initially be prepared in, e.g. 5 fragments, selected to have a Cys residue at the N-terminus of the fragment to be coupled. Fragment 1 is initially coupled to fragment 2 to give a first product, then after preparative HPLC purification, the first product is coupled to fragment 3 to give a second product. After preparative HPLC purification, the second product is coupled to fragment 4 to give a third product. Finally, after preparative HPLC purification, the third product is coupled to fragment 5 to give, the desired polypeptide, which is purified and refolded. ; - ^ ' - f ' .-, - -. ,• - .- -> ;. ^ ,v '••; > <x • ■ • <- ,
Thioester formation. Fragments 2, 3, 4, and 5 are synthesized on a thioester generating resin, as described above. For this puφose the following resin is prepared: S-acetylthiogly colic acid pentafluorophenylester is coupled to a Leu-PAM resin under conditions essentially as described by Hackeng et al (1999). In the first case, the resulting resin is used as a starting resin for peptide chain elongation on a 0.2 mmol scale after removal of the acetyl protecting group with a 30 min treatment with 10% mercaptoethanol, 10% piperidine in DMF. The N" of the N-terminal Cys residues of fragments 2 through 5 are protected by coupling a Boc-thioprohne (Boc-SPr, i.e. Boc-L-thioproline) to the terminus of the respective chains instead of a Cys having conventional Nαor Sp protection, e.g. Brik et al, J. Org. Chem, 65: 3829-3835 (2000). Peptide synthesis. Solid-phase synthesis is performed on a custom-modified 433A peptide synthesizer from Applied Biosystems, using in situ neutralization 2-(lH-benzotriazol-l-yl)- 1,1, 1,3,3 - tetramethyluronium hexafluoro-phosphate (HBTU) activation protocols for stepwise Boc chemistry chain elongation, as described by Schnolzer et al, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res, 40: 180-193 (1992). Each synthetic cycle consists of Nα-Boc -removal by a 1 to 2 min treatment with neat TFA, a 1-min DMF flow wash, a 10-min coupling time with 2.0 mmol of preactivated Boc-amino acid in the presence of excess DIEA and a second DMF flow wash. Nα-Boc-amino acids (2 mmol) are preactivated for 3min with 1.8mmol HBTU (0.5M in DMF) in the presence of excess DIEA (6mmol). After coupling of Gin residues, a dichloromethane flow wash is used before and after deprotection using TFA, to prevent possible high temperature (TFA/DMF)-cataIyzed pyrrolidone carboxylic acid formation. Side-chain protected amino acids are Boc-Arg(p-toluenesulfonyl)-OH, Boc-Asn(xanthyl)-OH, Boc-Asp(0-cyclohexyl)-OH, Boc-Cys(4-methylbenzyl)-OH, Boc-Glu(0- cyclohexyl)-OH, Boc-His(dinitrophenylbenzyl)-OH, Boc-Lys(2-Cl-Z)-OH, Boc-Ser(benzyl)-OH, Boc-Thr(benzyl)-OH, Boc-Tφ(formyl)-OH and Boc-Tyr(2-Br-Z)-OH (Oφagen Pharma, Heidelberg, Germany). Other amino acids are used without side chain protection C-terminal Fragment 1 is synthesized on Boc-Leu-0-CH2-Pam resin (0.71mmol/g of loaded resin), while for Fragments 2 through 5 machine-assisted synthesis is started on the Boc-Xaa-S-CH2-CO-Leu-Pam resin. This resin is obtained by the coupling of S-acetylthioglycolic acid pentafluorophenylester to a Leu-PAM resin under standard conditions. The resulting resin is used as a starting resin for peptide chain elongation on a 0.2 mmol scale after removal of the acetyl protecting group with a 30min treatment with 10% mercaptoethanol, 10% piperidine in DMF.
After chain assembly is completed, the peptide fragments are deprotected and cleaved from the resin by treatment with anhydrous hydrogen fluoride for lhr at 0°C with 5% p-cresol as a scavenger In all cases except Fragment 1, the imidazole side chain 2,4!-dinitrophenyl (DNP) . protecting groups remain on His residues because the DNP-removal procedure is incompatible with ( C-terminal thioester groups. However DNP is gradually removed by thiols during the ligation reaction, yielding unprotected His. After cleavage, peptide fragments are precipitated with ice-cold diethylether, dissolved in aqueous acetonitrile and lyophilized. The peptide fragments are purified by RP-HPLC with a C18 column from Waters by using linear gradients of buffer B (acetonitile/0.1% trifluoroacetic acid) in buffer A (H2O/0.1% tπfluoroacetic acid) and UV detection at 214nm. Samples are analyzed by electrospray mass spectrometry (ESMS) using an Esquire instrument (Brucker, Bremen , Germany), or like instrument.
Native chemical ligations. As described more fully below, the ligation of unprotected fragments is performed as follows: the dry peptides are dissolved in equimolar amounts in 6M guanidine hydrochloride (GuHCl), 0.2M phosphate, pH 7.5 in order to get a final peptide concentration of 1-8 mM at a pH around 7, and 1% benzylmercaptan, 1% thiophenol is added. Usually, the reaction is carried out overnight and is monitored by HPLC and electrospray mass spectrometry. The ligation product is subsequently treated to remove protecting groups still present The formyl group of Tφ is cleaved by shifting the pH of the solution up to 9.0 with hydrazine and incubating for lh at 37° C Opening of the N-terminal thiazolidine ring further required the addition of solid methoxamine to a 0.5M final concentration at pH3.5 and a further incubation for 2h at 37°C. A 10-fold excess of Tris(2-carboxyethyl)phosphine is added before preparative HPLC purification Fractions containing the polypeptide chain are identified by ESMS, pooled and lyophilized. The ligation of fragments 4 and 5 is performed at pH7.0 in 6 M GuHCl. The concentration of each reactant is 8mM, and 1% benzylmercaptan and 1% thiophenol were added to create a reducing environment and to facilitate the ligation reaction. An almost quantitative ligation reaction is observed after overnight stirring at 37°C At this point in the reaction, 0-NH2.HCl is added as a powder to a 0.1 M final concentration and hydrazine is added to shift the pH to 9.0, for the removal of the formyl group of any Tφ residues. After a lh incubation at 37°C, O-NH2.HCl is further added to the solution to get a 0.5M final concentration, and the pH adjusted to 3.5 in order to open the N- terminal thiazolidine ring. After 2h incubation at 37°C, ESMS is used to confirm the completion of the reaction. The reaction mixture is subsequently treated with a 10-fold excess of Tπs(2- carboxyethylphosphine) over the peptide fragment and after 15min, the ligation product is purified using the preparative HPLC (e.g , C4, 20-60% CH3CN, 0.5% per min), lyophilised, and stored at - 20°C
The same procedure is repeated for the remaining ligations with slight modification. Whenever the ligation takes place at an Ile-Cys or Val-Cys site, the ligation reaction is extended to 48h - - . * . . • ' . ' - .. < '. . Polypeptide Folding. The full length peptide is refolded by air oxidation by dissolving the reduced lyophilized protein (about 0.1 mg/mL) in 1M GuHCl, lOOmM Tris, lOmM methionine, pH 8.6 After gentle stirring overnight, the protein solution is purified by RP-HPLC as described above.
Example 2: Preparation of antibody compositions Substantially pure Pep 133-related peptide or a portion thereof is obtained. The concentration of protein in the final preparation is adjusted, for example, by concentration on an Amicon filter device, to the level of a few micrograms per ml. Monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies to the protein are then prepared as described in the sections titled "Monoclonal antibodies" and "Polyclonal antibodies." Briefly, to produce an anti-Pep 133 related peptide monoclonal antibody, a mouse is repetitively inoculated with a few micrograms of the Pep 133-related peptide or a portion thereof over a period of a few weeks. The mouse is then sacrificed, and the antibody producing cells of the spleen isolated. The spleen cells are fused by means of polyethylene glycol with mouse myeloma cells, and the excess unfused cells destroyed by growth of the system on selective media comprising aminopterin (HAT media). The successfully fused cells are diluted and aliquots of the dilution placed in wells of a microtiter plate where growth of the culture is continued. Antibody-producing clones are identified by detection of antibody in the supernatant fluid of the wells by immunoassay procedures, such as ELISA, as originally described by Engvall, E, Meth. Enzymol. 70. 419 (1980). Selected positive clones can be expanded and their monoclonal antibody product harvested for use. Detailed procedures for monoclonal antibody production are described in Davis, L. et al. Basic Methods in Molecular Biology Elsevier, New York. Section 21-2.
For polyclonal antibody production by immunization, polyclonal antiserum containing antibodies to heterogeneous epitopes in the Pep 133 -related peptide or a portion thereof are prepared by immunizing a mouse with the Pep 133-related peptide or a portion thereof, which can be unmodified or modified to enhance immunogenicity. Any suitable nonhuman animal, preferably a non-human mammal, may be selected including rat, rabbit, goat, or horse.
Antibody preparations prepared according to either the monoclonal or the polyclonal protocol are useful in quantitative immunoassays which determine concentrations of Pep 133-related peptide in biological samples; or they are also used semi-quantitatively or qualitatively to identify the presence of antigen in a biological sample. The antibodies may also be used in therapeutic compositions for killing cells expressing the protein or reducing the levels of the protein in the body.

Claims

1 An isolated polypeptide having a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs:3- 8, wherein said polypeptide has biological activity.
2 The isolated polypeptide of claim 1 , wherein said polypeptide further comprises the sequence of amino acids 1-20 of SEQ ID NO: 1.
3. The isolated polypeptide of claim 1, wherein said polypeptide is further fused to another, heteroiogous, polypeptide
4. A method of making a polypeptide of claim 1-3, said method comprising the steps of: i) providing a population of host cells capable of expressing said polypeptide of claim 1-3, ii) culturing said population of host cells under conditions conducive to the expression of said polypeptide; iii) isolating said polypeptide.
5. An antibody that selectively binds to the polypeptide of any one of Claims 1 to 3.
6. An antibody according to Claim 5, wherein said antibody is capable of inhibiting binding of said polypeptide to a Pep 133-related target molecule.
7 A method of determining whether a Pep 133-related peptide is present in a biological sample, said method comprising the steps of: (a) contacting a biological sample with a detectable compound that selectively binds to the polypeptide of any one of Claims 1 to 3, and (b) detecting the presence or absence of binding of said detectable compound to a polypeptide within said sample, wherein a detection of said binding indicates that said Pep 133-related peptide is present in said sample.
8. The method of claim 7, wherein said detectable compound is an antibody.
9. A method of determining whether a mammal has an elevated or reduced level of Pep 133-related peptides, comprising the steps of (a) providing a biological sample from said mammal;
(b) contacting said biological sample with a detectable compound capable of selectively binding to the polypeptide of any one of Claims 1 to 3;
(c) measuring the amount of said polypeptide in said biological sample; and (d) comparing the amount of said polypeptide to that of a control sample; wherein an increased amount of said Pep 133 -related peptide within said biological sample compared to said level detected in said control sample indicates that said mammal has an elevated level of Pep 133-related peptide expression, and wherein a decreased amount of said Pep 133-related peptide within said biological sample compared to said level detected in said control sample indicates that said mammal has a reduced level of Pep 133-related peptide expression.
10. A method of identifying a candidate Pep 133-related peptide modulator, said method comprising
(a) contacting a Pep 133-related peptide of any one of Claims 1 to 3 with a test compound; and
(b) determining whether said test compound selectively binds to said polypeptide; wherein a determination that said compound selectively binds to said polypeptide indicates that said compound is a candidate Pep 133-related peptide modulator.
1 1. A method of identifying a candidate Pep 133-related peptide modulator, said method comprising: (a) contacting a Pep 133-related peptide of any one of Claims 1 to 3 with a test compound; and (b) determining whether said compound selectively modulates a biological activity of said
Pep 133-related peptide, wherein a determination that said compound selectively modulates a Pep 133 -related activity indicates that said compound is a candidate Pep 133-related peptide modulator.
12. A composition comprising the polypeptide according to claim 1, further comprising a carrier or diluent.
13. A method for reducing cell growth, comprising the step of contacting a polypeptide of claim 1 with a population of cells.
14. The method of claim 13 wherein said composition is administered to an individual
15. The method of claim 14, wherein said composition is administered by injection.
PCT/EP2003/006535 2002-07-02 2003-06-20 Peptides derived from pep133 (g1p3, 6-16) WO2004005331A2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2003249857A AU2003249857A1 (en) 2002-07-02 2003-06-20 Peptides derived from pep133 (g1p3, 6-16)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US39369502P 2002-07-02 2002-07-02
US60/393,695 2002-07-02

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2004005331A2 true WO2004005331A2 (en) 2004-01-15
WO2004005331A3 WO2004005331A3 (en) 2004-06-10

Family

ID=30115627

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/EP2003/006535 WO2004005331A2 (en) 2002-07-02 2003-06-20 Peptides derived from pep133 (g1p3, 6-16)

Country Status (2)

Country Link
AU (1) AU2003249857A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2004005331A2 (en)

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
KELLY J M ET AL: "CHARACTERIZATION OF A HUMAN GENE INDUCIBLE BY ALPHA- AND BETA- INTERFERONS AND ITS EXPRESSION IN MOUSE CELLS" EMBO JOURNAL, IRL PRESS, EYNSHAM, GB, vol. 5, no. 7, 1986, pages 1601-1606, XP002050158 ISSN: 0261-4189 *
TURRI MARIA-GRAZIA ET AL: "Characterization of a novel minisatellite that provides multiple splice donor sites in an interferon-induced transcript" NUCLEIC ACIDS RESEARCH, vol. 23, no. 11, 1995, pages 1854-1861, XP001156214 ISSN: 0305-1048 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU2003249857A1 (en) 2004-01-23
WO2004005331A3 (en) 2004-06-10
AU2003249857A8 (en) 2004-01-23

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20070082363A1 (en) Secreted polypeptide species reduced cardiovascular disorders
WO2006005583A2 (en) Secreted polypeptide species involved in multiple sclerosis
US20080227125A1 (en) Secreted Polypeptide Species Reduced in Cardiovascular Disorders
US20070009955A1 (en) Secreted polypeptide species associated with cardiovascular disorders
JP2005533086A5 (en)
JP2007501605A (en) Secreted polypeptide species associated with cardiovascular disease
WO2006069765A2 (en) Secreted polypeptide species involved in multiple sclerosis
WO2006029838A2 (en) Secreted polypeptide species involved in alzheimer’s disease
JP2006526578A (en) Secreted polypeptide species decreased with cardiovascular disorders
US20060148690A1 (en) Secreted peptides
WO2006005585A2 (en) Secreted polypeptide species differentially expressed during pregnancy
US20060147447A1 (en) Secreted peptides
WO2004005331A2 (en) Peptides derived from pep133 (g1p3, 6-16)
US20070105169A1 (en) Secreted polypeptide species associated with cardiovascular disorders
EP1616194A2 (en) Secreted polypeptide species associated with cardiovascular disorders
US20070128664A1 (en) Secreted polypeptide species associated with cardiovascular disorders
US20070098635A1 (en) Secreted polypeptide species associatedwith cardiovascular disorders
WO2004101615A2 (en) Secreted polypeptide species associated with cardiovascular disorders
WO2005003782A1 (en) Secreted polypeptide species reduced in cardiovascular disorders
CA2512629A1 (en) Secreted polypeptide species (fragments from chitotriosidase) reduced in cardiovascular disorders
EP1641821A2 (en) Human secreted proteins

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IT LU MC NL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase
NENP Non-entry into the national phase in:

Ref country code: JP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Country of ref document: JP